The Pier Shareware 6/The_Pier_Shareware_Number_6_(The_Pier_Exchange)_(1995).iso/035/inimaint.zip/INIMAINT.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1994-10-10 | 307KB | 11,218 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Help for Items not yet done ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help for this item has not yet been written.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. About The Ini File Maintenance Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ini File Maintenance is a Presentation Manager-based application which is an
utility for the maintenance of the various OS/2 INI Files. IniMaint is a
Shareware product, therefore, it can be tried by simply downloading it from any
one of a number of electronic sources.

System Maintenance is an upgrade from IniMaint that will also process Extended
Attributes.  If SysMaint is purchased, then IniMaint is included, since
SysMaint is the more capable program.  If IniMaint is purchased, then only the
INI file code is activated.  An additional license fee is required to upgrade
IniMaint to SysMaint. SysMaint is not a Shareware product, therefore, the only
way to try SysMaint is to obtain a SysMaint Registration ID.

Multi Maintenance is an upgrade from SysMaint that will also Save and Restore
the desktop on an Object by Object basis. This Object by Object backup can be
used to move the Desktop from one machine to another or used to restore the
Desktop after the installation of a new version of OS/2 that required the user
to reformat the boot partition before doing the new install.  If MultiMaint is
purchased, then SysMaint and IniMaint are included, since MultiMaint is the
more capable program.  An additional license fee is required to upgrade
SysMaint or IniMaint to MultiMaint.  MultiMaint is not a Shareware product,
therefore, the only way to try MultiMaint is to obtain a MultiMaint
Registration ID.

The help facility is designed to give a context-sensitive description of either
the current window or the highlighted menu item within that window.

For more information about using the help facility, select Help for help on the
Help pull-down.

See also:

o General Help Information
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, SysSafe and MltSafe
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover
o Extended Attributes
o Desktop
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. General Help Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are a number of General area of information that do not easily fit into
any of the other Help categories.  The purpose of this section is to address
these areas.

The Subjects Covered are:

o Getting Started
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Operational Environment
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o Non Write INI Files
o Automatic Repair of Non Write INI Files
o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe

See also:

o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Getting Started Help Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The primary purpose of this section is to help the user who did not get
IniMaint or SysMaint to address a specific problem and one who is not familiar
with the INI Files and Extended Attributes.

If you are a new OS/2 user or are not familiar with INI Files and Extended
Attributes, then you should first review the various Help entries that are
listed under the See Also category for this Help item.  These General Help
entries will give you an overview of IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint and the
environment in which they operate.

One of the biggest concerns of those who are not knowledgeable about OS/2 is
that they do not want to do something that will damage their Desktop.  If this
is your primary concern, then you should start with IniSafe, SysSafe or
MltSafe.  Both of these have all of the menu items that the main program has.
However, all menu entries that could make any change to the INI Files or
Extended Attributes have been disabled.  Therefore, it is not possible to make
any changes with these programs.  You can use these program to explore the
contents of the various INI files and Extended Attributes and can play with all
of the menu items without worrying about causing a problem with your Desktop.

Once the user is ready to use the fully capable program, they should be sure
that they have a good backup of their Desktop.  If you have SysMaint, this can
be accomplished in less than a minute using the Desktop menu.  The user should
make a Backup of his Desktop and be sure to create a Restore CMD file, so that
the Restore can be done if a problem occurs with the Desktop.  If you are an
IniMaint user, then you can upgrade to SysMaint for a reasonable amount.  If
you already have a desktop Backup program, you should be sure you have a
current Backup and make a new one anytime you make enough changes to your
Desktop that you would be very unhappy to have to do them over again.

One word about making sure the Backup is a current one.  Much of the
information about those Desktop items that are represented as files, which
includes all folders, is kept in the Extended Attributes of the Desktop
Directory structure.  Currently, the Extended Attributes for the Desktop are
not updated except during a Shutdown of OS/2.  Therefore, if you have made
significant changes to the folders, the contents of folders or have rearranged
the  folders on the Desktop, it would be a good idea to do a Shutdown and
reboot before making a Backup.

The Backup is not recommended because of any known problem with IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint or even because using the programs will cause any
Desktop problems.  It is recommended because there are many things which can
cause problems with a Desktop and, as time goes on, the ways that a Desktop can
be damaged will change.  No one should be without a plan to recover from any
kind of damage that might be done to their Desktop, unless they want to gain
experience doing their Desktop customization over and over.  It takes but a
minute to make the Backup and having it can save many hours of work. Here are
Carry Associates, we have clobbered the Desktop in many different ways, but
have never had to reinstall OS/2 because we have always had a Backup and a plan
for how we would recover from a Desktop problem.

A word about the warnings that you will see both in the documentation and when
you are about to perform certain INI File or Extended Attribute changes.  There
are those who say that some of the warnings are too extreme and make the user
very uncomfortable.  It is very possible that this is correct.  However, we
have left things the way they are because we believe it is a good thing for any
user to pause and make sure that they really want to do what they are
attempting and to be sure that they understand what is happening.  If any user
finds themselves at one of these warnings and is not sure about what is going
to happen, then they should Cancel.  The purpose of this Help file is to
explain things to the point that each user will understand each function before
they use it.  If this is not the case, then we at Carry Associates will be more
than happy to talk to you and help you understand what is going on.  This will
also help us to know where additional Help explanation is warranted.

Once the Backup of the Desktop is safely done.  Each user should use the Repair
INI Files entry on the Recover Menu to do a Repair of both the File Handles and
the WPS Entries.  The best way to do this is to leave the Type of Repair at the
default, Report Only, and ask for a Repair of the File Handles and then the WPS
entries.  Once the user is comfortable that all of the listed items should be
Repaired, the Do Repair button can be selected and then click on Execute to
actually perform the Repairs.  These two Repair functions will remove any
entries in the OS2.INI or OS2SYS.INI files that represent files or WPS Objects
that no longer exist on the Desktop.

While the items discussed above are the primary Repair items, there is a long
list of other kinds of Repair.  The best way to get more information on a
specific type of Repair, simply highlight one of the Repair Types in the Drop
Down Combobox and hit the F1 key, this will give you the Help for that specific
Repair Action.

Aside from the above and lacking a specific problem, it is suggested that users
might want to go through both the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files, just to review
their contents.  Simply looking at the names of the Applications, Key Names and
the values will give any user a lot of information on how OS/2 works and the
purpose of the INI files.

If you have SysMaint, then it is worthwhile to View the Extended Attributes for
the Desktop Directory, all of its sub directories and files.  This will make
the structure of OS/2 much clearer and will help the user to understand the
real power and utility of the Extended Attributes.

See also:

o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Help for What is an INI File? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is not intended to be a replacement for the normal documentation on INI
files, but just a very general orientation explaining the reason I started the
development of IniMaint.

Many, if not all applications that run in any computer environment need to have
a place to keep information that is system specific.  In a standard DOS
environment, every application must define a place for this information and
manage it themselves.  With the advent of Windows and it's requirement that a
lot of Windows information be kept somewhere, a standard file approach was
developed.  In the original Windows environment this file was called WIN.INI
and could contain information about Applications as well as Windows itself.
This file was, and still is, a standard ASCII text file and this causes some
problems.  Specifically, much of the data stored in the file could be more
efficiently stored and used if it was in a binary format and, more important,
an ASCII file meant that the user could, and almost always did, edit the file.
This editing can introduce errors, so the parsing of the file becomes a big
problem.  Because of formatting and performance problems, some of the standard
information needed to run individual programs was still not stored in the INI
file, but was stored in individual Program Information Files or PIF files.
These files were binary, thus solving the performance and editing problems,
since they were maintained by Windows itself. However, this generated a  number
of tiny files, each one taking an entire allocation unit on the harddisk and
generating a significant backup problem.  OS/2 takes the concept a step further
by making the INI files binary files and incorporating all of the information
that Windows stores in the PIF files in the same file.  These files OS2.INI,
for user information, and OS2SYS.INI, for system information.  In addition, a
set of OS/2 API's are supplied to manage these files.

The OS/2 INI files are organized on three levels:

 1. The highest level is the Application Name.

 2. Within each Application, there is a series of individual entries which are
    called Keys and identified by a Key name.

 3. Associated with each Key name is the actual data for the Application/Key
    pair or Key value.

For example, IniMaint will create a new Application called "INI File
Maintenance" in the OS2.INI file.  This is the IniMaint Application name.  One
of the Keys that IniMaint will create is "Current INI" which is used to keep
track of which INI file the user is currently working with.  The Key value for
this Application/Key pair will be the path and filename of the current INI
file.

Since the files are binary, the performance is reasonable, especially since the
files do not have to be accessed that often.  In addition, the contents of the
files are managed by OS/2, so there is not a problem of parsing the entries to
insure that they are properly formatted.

However, this creates other problems.  For example, there is no way for a user
to even find out what is in the files, even for applications that he has
installed.  One of the advantages of the fact that the Windows INI files were
ASCII and the PIF files were application specific was that they user could
install an application on one system and then move it, with customizing, to
other systems by moving the PIF files and, sometimes, some entries from the INI
files.  None of this is possible in an OS/2 environment.  Every machine must be
customized manually and every change must be made in every system.  Further, it
turns out that no application, including OS/2 itself, makes any provision for
removing obsolete entries from the INI files.  Therefore, as you change your
OS/2 environment and upgrade or change your applications, the OS2.INI file and
OS2SYS.INI files get bigger and bigger as they fill with information that no
longer applies to your environment.  Finally, since OS/2 always has the User
and System INI files open, there is no way to create a backup of these files
except during boot time. This normally means you have to keep several layers of
copies, since you have to reboot to fix anything.

IniMaint was developed to address the new problems introduced by the new INI
file approach in OS/2.  With IniMaint you can review what is in the files,
change it, delete old entries, do complete or partial backups at any time and
otherwise have an appropriate level of control over these files.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Help for What is an Extended Attribute? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Extended Attributes are added to directories and files to describe the
contents, use, association and many other aspects of the directory or file.
The Extended Attributes are not an actual part of the file, but are associated
with the file.  For HPFS this Extended Attribute information is kept in the
Directory entry, for FAT the information is kept in a separate file, since
there is not enough room in the directory.  Refer to the OS/2 documentation for
a more complete discussion of Extended Attributes themselves.

One of the problems with OS/2 is that, while it makes extensive use of Extended
Attributes, it does not provide the user with the tools necessary to deal with
problems or give users the tools necessary to understand them.  While this is a
problem for everyone, it is especially a problem for developers who might want
to take advantage of Extended Attributes in their applications.

SysMaint is designed to all the user to look at the Extended Attributes that
are present on their system, edit them, if necessary, and do a number of
different kinds of maintenance functions. However, before discussing how
SysMaint handles Extended Attributes, it is necessary to be sure that everyone
understands a little about how Extended Attributes are structured.  The
following discussion assumes that the reader is already familiar with IniMaint,
the structure of the IniMaint windows and how IniMaint displays and maintains
INI Files.

The is a parallel between how INI files are structured and how Extended
Attributes are structured so SysMaint uses most of the IniMaint code to handle
the Extended Attributes.  INI Files are organized into Applications that have
one or more Keys and each Key has a Value assigned to that Key.  Extended
Attributes are associated with a Directory or a File, each of which can have
more than one Extended Attribute and each Extended Attribute has a Name and an
associated value.  Therefore, SysMaint will display the names of the
Directories or Files in the Application Window, the Names of the Extended
Attributes in the Key Name Window and the Extended Attribute Value in the Key
Value Window.

The approach above works very well for Simple Extended Attributes. However, the
parallel between INI Files and Extended Attributes breaks down when it
encounters a Multiple Value Extended Attribute, so some modifications are
needed to handle this situation.

There are three general types of Extended Attributes as  as SysMaint is
concerned:

 1. Extended Attributes that SysMaint does not understand and will display just
    as they are found.

 2. Simple Extended Attributes that use the type identifiers that are
    documented in the OS/2 documentation.  These are Extended Attributes that
    closely parallel the INI File structure and are displayed that way.

 3. Multiple Extended Attributes, which are Extended Attributes that contain
    other Extended Attributes.  These are the Extended Attributes that do not
    closely parallel the INI File structure.

There were two different ways that SysMaint could handle the Multiple Value
Extended Attributes:

 1. They could simply be identified as Multiple Value and the entire Extended
    Attribute could be placed in the Key Value Window.

 2. The structure of the Multiple Value Extended Attribute could be decoded and
    displayed in the windows in a decoded form.

Since the decoding of the Multiple Value Extended Attributes is not a trivial
task, especially since a Multiple Value Extended Attribute can contain other
Multiple Value Extended Attributes, thus causing multiple levels of decoding,
SysMaint will decode the Multiple Value Extended Attributes and display them in
decoded form.  This causes a single Extended Attribute to have multiple entries
in the Key Name window.  In order to create unique Key Entries and to display
the level of the Extended Attribute, each Key Name will be followed by two
additional pieces of data, each placed inside a pair of parens.

 1. The Level of the Extended Attribute.  For a Simple Extended Attribute this
    will simply be: (01).  For a Multiple Value Extended Attribute the numbers
    will start with (01) and increase by one for each of the Extended
    Attributes within the initial one.  If another level of Multiple Value
    Extended Attributes is encountered, then an additional level will be added
    to the Level Information: ( 04.01), would mean that the fourth main level
    Extended Attribute is a Multiple Value Extended Attribute and this is the
    first entry for that Extended Attribute.

 2. The type of Extended Attribute, such as Ascii, Binary, Icon or Multiple
    Value.

This arrangement sounds complicated, but it ends up looking very much like an
outline would look and is not difficult to understand. Since all of the entries
will start with the name of the Extended Attribute, it is very easy to know
which entries go with which.

The on-line Help for SysMaint has extensive detailed descriptions of how to
select which Extended Attributes you want to operate on, what operation you
want done and how you want to handle the various default actions.  Therefore,
it might be very useful to review the On-line Help before doing much with the
actual Extended Attributes.

Finally, a word of warning and a request for help.

The warning is that Extended Attributes can be critical to the health of you
environment.  Therefore, you should not do something with the Extended
Attributes on your system if you are not sure you understand what you are
doing.  You cannot hurt yourself if you simply look at Extended Attributes via
the Edit Function or Save them.  However, something like Splitting the Extended
Attributes from a file will leave the file without the Attributes.  If you are
doing it so you can backup the file under DOS and will be careful to Join the
Extended Attributes back to the files before you use them.  If you are not sure
about what you want to do, please go to the OS2AVEND Forum on Compuserve,
Section 1 and we will be more than happy to discuss your intentions and any
potential problems.

The request for help involves supplying documentation on any unusual conditions
you might encounter.  One of the items in the Default Dialog for the Extended
Attributes is to activate a log to the INIEA.LOG file.  Anytime you encounter a
condition where SysMaint cannot handle an Extended Attribute condition or have
invalid Extended Attributes, I would ask you to turn on the logging, ask to
Edit the Extended Attributes that are invalid or causing a problem, close
SysMaint, zip the resulting INIEA.LOG file and Email it to use using the
Compuserve ID in the main documentation or mail to the supplied address.  This
will allow us to be able to see the various conditions that occur and modify
the program to handle them.

See also:

o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Help for How to Modify Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Extended Attributes for a set of Directories and/or Files can obviously be
modified by using the Extended Attribute Menu Item Join. However, it is often
the case that a user simply wants to look at the Extended Attributes for a
specific Directory or File and then make some sort of minor modification to
them. The purpose of this Help entry is to explain how to do that, since a
number of users have expressed confusion in this area. Here is how it is done:

 1. Use the View entry on the Extended Attribute Menu to get the Extended
    Attributes for the appropriate Directory and/File into a temporary file. It
    is okay to select more Directories and/Files than you want to modify, since
    any set of Extended Attributes that are not changed will simply get written
    back unchanged.
 2. Modify the Extended Attributes in the various windows as desired. There are
    a number of checks in the code to prevent a user from making changes that
    would create illegal Extended Attributes, however, care should still be
    exercised in this area. In short, if you are clear on what is allowed and
    what is not allowed, then you should not make any changes or be sure you
    have a solid backup of the area you are changing.
 3. Once the changes have been made, then the actual Extended Attributes can be
    updated by selecting the Update From Current File entry on the Extended
    Attribute Menu.

See also:

o What is an Extended Attribute?
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Help for What makes up the Desktop? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When OS/2 2.1 is booted and assuming the boot is from a Harddisk, the PM Shell
is loaded and one of the first thing the PM Shell does is to start the
Workplace Shell and the WPS, after thinking about it for awhile, brings up the
Desktop.  While this is a loose description of the sequence of events, it is a
accurate picture of what happens.

The Desktop consists of a Background and a bunch of Objects that appear on the
Background, most of which are called Folders and contain either other Folders,
Programs or other sorts of useful things.  This Desktop is mentioned over and
over in the documentation in order to teach the user how to use, maintain,
modify and otherwise interact with OS/2 via the Desktop.

A lot of Applications have been written by people outside of IBM that are
designed to help users maintain and backup the Desktop and both IniMaint,
MultiMaint and SysMaint are in this category.  However, little is said in the
documentation about exactly what is the Desktop, so I thought I would address
this question.

The WPS itself is actually a PM Application, much like any other PM Application
and runs as a single Process under the control of OS/2.  However, the WPS is an
extremely complex and powerful Application that controls the entire operating
environment.  The Application code itself is made up of the same stuff that any
other Application is made of and that is executable files, all of which are
DLL's, I think.  The actual code that runs the Desktop is clearly the same for
everyone that is using the same version of OS/2 and this code is never changed
during the operation of WPS, so the unique characteristics of each Desktop must
be somewhere else.

The is also a lot of discussion of INI files, especially the ones used by the
operating system, OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI, and there is some discussion of
Extended Attributes.  Finally, there is a Directory structure that gets created
on the drive used as the base for the WPS that appears to contain nothing more
than a bunch of empty Directories.

The Desktop consists of a collection of Objects that are created by WPS from
the Object information that is kept in two places.

The first kind of of Object on the Desktop is called a File Object and every
File Object is represented by a Directory in the Desktop Directory, including
the Desktop itself.  The reason the Desktop Directories appear to be empty is
because all of the information needed to create a File Object is kept in the
Extended Attributes for the specific Directory.

The second kind of Object on your Desktop is called an Abstract Object and the
information needed to create this kind of Object is kept in the OS2*.INI files,
mostly the OS2.INI files.

In summary, the entire Desktop is contained in the Desktop Directory structure,
the Extended Attributes for the Desktop Directory and the contents of the
OS2*.INI files.  With one exception, at least one of the Desktop Directories
will have files in it, the Templates Directory, and these files along with
their Extended Attributes are also part of the Desktop.  Therefore, all that is
required to make a Simple Backup of the Desktop that can be used to restore the
current environment on the current machine is to make a copy of the above
items.

See also:

o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Help for System and User File Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two standard INI Files that are used by OS/2.  The System INI file,
normally OS2SYS.INI, is used to store system level initialization and control
information.  The User INI File, OS2.INI, is used to store application level
initialization and control information.

The distinction between what is system level information and what is
application level information appears to the author to be somewhat blurred. It
looks like a lot of information that could be considered system level
information is stored in the User INI file.

It makes little difference to the User how OS/2 decides where to put various
pieces of information, since it does not change how applications that are
installed on the Desktop should handle their initialization and control
information.  The System INI File should not ever be used by any application
installed on the Desktop, except things such as device drivers and other
applications that are clearly System Applications.  All user Desktop
applications must store their information in the User INI file or in their own
application INI file.  To date, most applications have chosen to use the User
INI file rather than create an INI file just for their application.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What does Repair Do?
o What is an INI File?
o General Help Information
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Help for Non Write INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

V2.1 of OS/2 changed the way the INI files are kept updated. The new scheme was
a welcome one because it greatly improved the performance of this area of OS/2
and removed the problem of INI files becoming very large because of a lot of
unused space.  However, the change introduced a problem that had not existed
previously, that is, it is possible to get into a situation where the OS2.INI
and OS2SYS.INI files cannot be updated.  When this condition occurs and any
changes are made to the Desktop, it appears that the changes are being made
correctly.  However, only the INI file information that is kept in memory is
being updated, that actual INI files are not changed in any way.  Even though
this situation exists, the user is given not warning or information that there
is a problem.  Normally, the user would discover the problem when the changes
made to the Desktop disappeared the next time that OS/2 was booted.
Occasionally, the problem would be even more serious because one of the INI
files could be updated, but the other could not.  This can cause serious
problems with the Desktop.

Many users, when they realize they have this problem, look at the INI file
entries in the directory and see that the RO attribute is turned on.  They then
assume that this is the problem and reset the bit.  However, the RO attribute
should always be on for any INI file that is open, and resetting the attribute
does not solve the problem.  The real problem is that the files used as a
target for the INI file updates, zero length hidden files with a !!! extension
are missing.  The reason these files are missing is because the INI files
already had the RO attribute turned on when the PM Shell was started,
therefore, the INI file code did not create the !!! files.  The best manual
solution is to boot from a diskette or reboot, if the user has ShiftRun, and
reset the RO attribute off while the PM Shell is not active.  This will fix the
problem and the INI files will now be updated normally.

See also:

o Automatic Repair of Non Write INI Files
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Test for Non Write INI Files
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Help for Automatic Repair of Non Write INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Anytime that IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint attempts to update an INI file
and the update fails, a check is made to see if the file is either the User or
System INI files.  If either file is found, the it is assumed that one or both
of the INI files is in a condition where is cannot be updated.  Normally, this
condition would cause IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint to terminate.  Since
there is a way to fix this situation, but the fix involves resetting WPS,
IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint will inform the user of the situation and ask
them if they want the condition fixed.  If the user replies no, then the
application will terminate.  If the user replies yes, then the INI files will
be fixed so that they can be updated.

Normally, IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint will recognize this condition
during the start-up of the application.  This is because the IniMaint,
MultiMaint and SysMaint operational information is normally stored in the
OS2.INI file, thus this file is normally updated very often.  However, it is
possible that no updates will be attempted to the file because all of the
defaults are already set or because the user has moved the application
operational information to a different INI file.  In the first case, the
condition will be recognized as soon as any action is taken which changes any
of the IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint operational information.  In the second
case, the condition will not be recognized unless the User or System INI files
are made the current INI file and an attempt is made to change something in one
of these files.

See also:

o Non Write INI Files
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Test for Non Write INI Files
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Help for What is an IniMaint Group? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An IniMaint Group is a set of Applications in a specific INI file that has been
formed and named by the user and is used as a convenient way to manipulate the
contents of the INI file.  Without some way to form subsets of all of the
Applications in an INI file, the only way to manipulate it is either
Application by Application, which can be tedious, or by using the entire file,
which provides no flexibility.  Since one of the objectives of IniMaint is to
give the user an easy way to create backups of all or part of his INI files and
to provide an easy way to restore an INI file, neither level of manipulation is
satisfactory.

IniMaint solves this problem by giving the user the ability relate a set of
Applications together into a Group.  Forming the Group does not change the
Application information in the INI file, it simply creates an additional
Application in the file that describes the Groups that the user has formed.
Once the Groups are created, then the Group name can be used in IniMaint
operations and all the Applications in the Group will be included.

For example, many users install a number of programs that put entries into the
standard User INI file, normally OS2.INI.  If there is a problem with the
environment, something happens to the INI files or some other problem arises
that clobbers the INI entries, then the only recovery is to re-customize all of
these applications.  If the user were to put all of these Applications into a
Group called 'My Applications', then he would not have this problem.  The My
Applications Group could be backed up to a backup INI file at any time using
the INICOPY program as follows:

INICOPY -IC:\OS2\OS2.INI -OC:\OS2\MYAPPS.INI -G"My Applications"

The above assumes the normal name and location for the INI files.  The name of
the Group must be enclosed in ""'s if it contains any blanks or the Command
Processor will split it into two different command line entries and INICOPY
will return an error.

The same Group could be restored to the User INI file as follows:

INICOPY -OC:\OS2\OS2.INI -IC:\OS2\MYAPPS.INI -G"My Applications"

In other words, simply reverse the Input and Output filenames.

It is intended that this same approach can be used to keep multiple physical
computers in synch with each other.  Right now, if the user has multiple
systems, he must customize every installed application on every system.  You
cannot move the INI files from one system to another, since there is a lot of
information in the INI files that is system specific.  Using IniMaint, this
process is made much easier, since the target INI file can be on a diskette
and, even if there are some minor differences between the systems such as drive
letters or something like that, IniMaint can be used to make modifications to
the contents of the transfer INI file before it is copied to the new system.
This does not need to be limited to installation situations. One possible
approach would be to form an Applications Group and, whenever any significant
change is made to any application, the changes can be transferred to the other
systems.  In fact, there is not reason, assuming the user had many systems and
a LAN, that a separate transfer INI file could not be set up for every
application, have it updated from a central source whenever a significant
change is made and have a CMD file on individual client systems that would use
the transfer INI files just for the applications installed on that system.

I suspect there are many ways to utilize the Group concept.  As of this
writing, IniMaint has only been used by a few Beta testers and only for a short
time.  Hopefully, as more users install and use IniMaint, more ideas on how the
IniMaint Groups can be used will be developed.  I will do my best to include
this new information into the IniMaint documentation and make it available on
the Compuserve OS2AVEND Forum.

See also:

o What is an INI File?
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Help for What does Repair Do? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IniMaint has an item on the Recover menu called Repair.  This item gives the
user the ability to perform a number of different automatic Repair actions on
his INI files.  The On-line Help documents how the Repair function works,
however, it does not detail the rational and algorithms employed by IniMaint to
accomplish the various Repairs.

In general there are two different catagories of Repair.  Some of the Repair
items act on the INI file that is the current INI file, whose name is displayed
in the Title Bar.  For example the Check for Zero Length Key Values will look
in the current INI file for any Key Value that has a Zero Length, which is not
a valid condition.  The other catagory of Repair item behaves the same no
matter what is the current INI file.  These Repair items act on the files that
are currently being used by OS/2 as the User INI, normally OS2.INI, and the
System INI, normally OS2SYS.INI, files.  For these System Level Repairs, it
makes no difference which INI file is the current INI file, because the Repair
item is not working on that file.  For example, the Repair File Handles item
will look at the File Handle Structure that is in the INI file that OS/2 is
currently using as the System INI file, check these Handles against the actual
Paths and Files that exist on the HD and Repair those that do not exist. This
section is an attempt to do that.

Type of Repair

There are four different type of Repair Options.

The first one, Report Only, will never make any changes, but will only list the
items that would have been Repaired if the Do Repair Option had been chosen.

The Ask First, will ask the user if he wants each item repaired as the item is
found and determined to be invalid.  This can take a very long time in some
cases, since the number of items can become quite large

Do Repair, will automatically remove all invalid items for the category
selected from the appropriate INI file.  This should only be used when the user
is sure he wants all invalid items removed.

Do Selected can only be used after Report Only, since it requires that the
invalid items be visible in the window.  When Execute is chosen with the Do
Selected button checked, then every line in the window that is selected will be
deleted.  The only exception to this is when doing either the Handles or WPS
repair and a selected item has dependent items, such as subdirectories or
files, in this case all dependent items will also be deleted.  For example, if
a Drive name itself is selected and Do Selected is chosen, then all entries for
the drive, including all directories and files, that have been identified as
invalid will be deleted.

The easiest and safest way to remove invalid items when the user is not sure if
they want everything done is to use the Report Only option, select the items
that they want deleted and then use Do Selected.  This cycle can be repeated
over and over until all of the desired items have been deleted.

Window Behavior

When and item is deleted for any reason, the word 'Deleted' will appear after
the item in the window.  If there are deleted items in the window and
additional items are selected for deletion then the previously deleted items
will be removed from the window.  For example, if the first item in the window
is selected and deleted, the word deleted would appear after the first item.
If then the second items is selected and deleted, the second item will now have
the word deleted after it and the first item will be gone from the window.

Options

Different users want to handle directories and file that are on removable, not
ready, cdrom and vdisk devices differently.  The Options dialog gives each user
the ability to choose how they want each of these types of situations handled.

If Ignore is chosen, then directories and files on the appropriate type of
device will be completely ignored and will never appear in the repair window.

If Report Only is selected, then the information will appear in the window, but
will not get automatically deleted if the Do Repair option is chosen.  The
Report Only items can still be deleted by selecting them and using the Do
Selected option.

If Auto Repair, which is the default, is chosen, then the items will be
reported and will be automatically deleted if Do Repair is chosen.

The Do Not Save Deleted Items button will cause IniMaint to not save items that
are deleted from an INI file in the Save INI File. Normally, the user must
specify a Save INI File and any entries removed from any INI file are written
to the Save INI File before they are modified.  This allows the user to restore
items that he has deleted if they discover that something has been deleted in
error and no backup is available.

The Log to INIREP.LOG is used for diagnostic purposes.

List Items versus Repair Items

For a number of the repair categories there are multiple choices available.
The is always the Repair choice and it works the same for each category of
Repair.  When the Repair choice is used, the only items that will appear in the
window will be items that are invalid and should be deleted.

If the user want to see the valid items for the category or all the items, then
the appropriate List entry can be used to display these entries.  The List
Invalid items is the same as the Repair as  as the contents of the window is
concerned, however, it is safer because it is not possible to select or
otherwise delete any of the items.

Repair Pathnames and Filenames

Many, if not all, applications installed under OS/2 store things in various INI
files.  However, few, if any, applications will remove things from these files
when they are deinstalled or the directory structure is changed.  This Repair
action looks at the Pathname and Filename entries in an INI file, compares them
to the current Desktop and either identifies and/or removes entries that are
obsolete.

The action IniMaint will take depends on the structure of the individual Key
Name or Key Value.  There are two possibilities that IniMaint looks for:

 1. A Filename with no preceding Path information.

 2. A full Pathname or Filename combination.

Each of the above are handled differently.

General Processing applicable to both type of names:

Any name that is too short, less than 3 characters, or too long, longer than
the maximum path length returned by DosQSysInfo, will not be tested further.

Any name which contains non-printable characters will not be tested.

Processing of Filename with no Path information:

If the beginning of a Key Name or Key Value starts with either X:\ or just \,
IniMaint assumes it is a full Pathname or Filename and processes it as
described below.  IniMaint will then check for a Filename of the form *.XXX and
ignore them, since this is simply a definition of a type of file extension and
not an actual file.  IniMaint will then look for .XXX as the last four
characters of the Filename and will search for the following combinations:

 1. .EXE using the PATH Environment variable.

 2. .CMD using the PATH Environment variable.

 3. .DLL using the LIBPATH Environment variable.

 4. .HLP using the HELP Environment variable.

Processing of full Pathname or Filename:

If the name starts with \, then the drive used as the drive for the OS2.INI
file, which is the boot drive, will be appended to the start of the name.

Any name that starts with A: or B: will be ignored, since they are assumed to
be floppy drives and probably do not contain any media.

Any trailing semicolons are removed from the name, since there are a number of
entries that are valid Filenames except for the semicolons.

If the trailing character in the name is a \ or if the name contains any
embedded semicolons, it will be tried as a Pathname and made a candidate for
removal if it is not found.

All other qualifying names will be tried as both a Filename and a Pathname and
will be made a candidate for removal if they fail both tests.

Remove Old PM_ProgramList Entries

There are some entries that can be left in the OS2.INI file from V1.3 or V2.0,
but these entries are no longer needed for V2.1.  This item will remove these
old entries.

Delete Unused Printer Entries

When Printer Objects are removed from the Desktop, sometimes old Printer
information is left in the OS2SYS.INI file that will cause problems for various
applications that use these entries to determine which Printers can be used for
printing.  A number of Word Processing programs do this.  Many, if not all, of
these programs do not check to verify that all of the entries in the OS2SYS.INI
file actually represent Printers that are actually installed, therefore, will
sometimes attempt to use a Printer that does not exist.  This entry will remove
all of the references to Printers that are no longer installed.

Destroy Objects

Most, if not all, of the items on the Desktop have been assigned an Object
Number.  This number along with the name of the Object is stored in the OS2.INI
file.  This Repair entry will display and give the user the option to delete
and Object.  It is not currently possible for IniMaint to determine which
Objects are valid and which are invalid, so IniMaint will never identify an
Object as invalid. Great care should be exercised when deleting any of the
Objects, since it is possible to do serious damage to your Desktop.

The structure which stores all of the Object cross reference is used by the WPS
Repair code to determine if Objects are valid and to find the names of valid
Objects.

Restore Missing Location Entries

A conflict can arise between the entries in the PM_Abstract:Objects entry in
the OS2.INI file and the PM_Workplace:Location entry.  The conflict is that the
Objects entry will reference Locations that are not actually in the Location
entry.  This will not normally represent a problem, but if unusual things are
going on with the Desktop, this entry allows the user to identify the conflicts
and, if they choose, have them fixed.

Repair Directory/File Handles

Many Drives, Directories and Files are assigned Handles.  This Handle
information is stored in the OS2SYS.INI file.  However, when files are moved,
directories changed or other changes are made to the Desktop, the Handle
information is not updated.  This Repair option gives the user the ability to
see the contents of the INI file Handles entry and Repair any or all of the
invalid entries.

It is difficult to remove incorrect information manually, even knowing the
internal structure of the entries, because all of the Handles information is
stored in a single INI file entry and a small mistake in modifying could cause
serious Desktop problems and/or create a non-bootable situation.

The structure which stores all of the Handles information is used by the WPS
Repair code to determine if Handles are valid and to find the names of
Directories and Files.

Repair WPS Entries

WPS stores a variety of Desktop information in the INI files.  As with the
Handles information above, obsolete information is not always removed from the
INI files when changes are made to the Desktop.  This Repair option gives the
user the ability to see what is in his INI files and remove those entries that
are invalid.

As with the Handles above, it is difficult to make these changes manually
because things are stored in a number of different formats and the cross
reference between the random looking numbers and the actual Objects and Handles
would be very tedious to track manually.

The Repair WPS Entries uses the Objects and Handles structures.  This means
that these structures must be filled before the WPS structure can be filled.
This can take a significant amount of time in situations where the Desktop is
complex and/or there are a large number of invalid entries.

Repair Both WPS and Handles Entries

This is simply a combination of Repair WPS Entries and Repair Directory/File
Handles above.  It allows the user to do both types of Repair with a single
action.

Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs

This is a short hand way to do all of the Repairs that Repair System level
things, as opposed to Individual File Repairs.  This Repair currently includes
the Delete Unused Printers, Repair WPS Entries, and Repair File Handles.  There
are a couple of other Repairs that are actually System level Repairs, such as
Destroy Objects and Restore Missing Location Entries which are not included.
The reason these Repairs are not included is because it is up to the user to
decide which entries need to be Repaired, so there is no way to automatically
identify which entries to include in the Repair.

Do All Individual INI File Repairs

This is a short hand way to do all of the Repairs that apply to the current INI
file, as opposed to the Repair of the System Level entries.  This Repair
currently includes the Check for missing Path and File Names and the Deletion
of Zero Length Key Values.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Help about the Operational Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are a number of Operation Environment considerations when running
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint and they are discussed in this section.

There are situations where one or more recovery actions must be done when the
PM Shell is not active, such as Restoring the Desktop. Normally, it is
necessary to boot from a diskette to get into this mode, since the PM Shell is
loaded during the processing of the CONFIG.SYS file.  However, there is an IBM
Employee Written program that is free and available on Compuserve, ShiftRun
that will  the processing of the CONFIG.SYS file at the point where all of the
drivers are loaded, but the PM Shell has not been started.  All of the
IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint recovery activities that must be done without
the PM Shell can be done during this interruption.  ShiftRun then allows the
rest of the normal boot to continue.  This application can greatly ease the
recovery problems and is mentioned here for that reason.

The Simple Backup and Restore facilities in SysMaint assume that the user has
installed an OS/2 version of Zip and UnZip and that the installed versions are
ones that will handle Extended Attributes.  Any version of the programs from
V1.93 and beyond have this capability.  It is further assumed that these
programs are in a directory that is in the PATH so they can be run without
specifying the directory in which the EXE files are located.  If both of these
assumptions are not true, the Backup and Restore functions will not work
correctly.

See also:

o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Help for Types of Desktop Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are two different kinds of Desktop Backups, which will be referred to as
Simple and Portable.  The purpose of this section is to discuss the difference
between them.

The most common type of Desktop Backup is a Simple Backup. This is the fastest
kind of Backup and is the easiest to use to restore a damaged Desktop.  This
type of backup make an image, using one technique or another, of the existing
Desktop and saves the information in one or more files that can then be used to
Restore the Desktop to the condition that existed at the time the Backup was
made.

The advantage of this kind of Backup is that it is fast and simple.

The disadvantage is that the Backup can only be used to Restore the Desktop of
the machine it was run on and for the Version of OS/2 that produced it.  In
other words, it is not possible to use the files generated to Restore the
Desktop on a different machine, unless the machines are exactly the same and it
is not possible to use to Restore the Desktop after a new Version of OS/2 has
been installed and the Desktop was destroyed because the Harddisk had to be
reformatted.

Most users will never need any other kind of Backup other than a Simple one
because they do not need to move the Desktop from one machine to another and
they can install each new Version of OS/2 over the previous Version and this
will preserve the existing Desktop.

The second type of Desktop Backup is a Portable one. This kind of Backup is
normally more complex to create and more complex to use.  It will normally also
take considerably more time to create a Portable  Backup.

The advantage of a Portable Backup is that it can be used, normally, to set up
a similar Desktop on another machine and can be used to restore the Desktop
after an installation of a new Version of OS/2 that required that the Harddisk
be reformatted.

The disadvantage of this kind of Backup is that it is harder to create, harder
to use, requires more resources and does not create a Backup that is usable for
simply Restoring the Desktop on the existing machine.  The reason a Portable
Backup is not able to recreate the Desktop on the existing machine is because
there is information in the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files that is not saved in
this process.  Therefore, the INI files that would exist after a Restore using
this kind of Backup would be incomplete.  The files would lack both some of the
OS/2 System information, which could be redone manually with not too much
effort, and they would lack all of the information that was added to them by
the various Applications that were installed.  Most, if not all, of these
applications would have to be reinstalled or have their INI information saved
in some other manner.  Since the easiest way to save the INI file information
is to make a Simple Backup of the Desktop, there is little reason to make a
Portable one for normal day to day operation.

See also:

o The Problem with Shadows
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Help for The Problem with Shadows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When MultiMaint attempts to Restore an Object that has a Shadow on the Desktop
or attempts to restore the an Object that is a Shadow, there are some
additional things that need to be considered.  The way that WPS keeps track of
the Object being Shadowed, that is the original Object, is via the Object
Handle of the Original Object. The Object Handle of an Object will be different
on different machines and can be different if the Object is destroyed and
recreated on the same machine.  The result of this is that the connection
between a Shadow and the original Object will be broken under many of the
combinations that are possible during an Object by Object Restore of the
Desktop.

When a Shadow Object is Restored, MultiMaint uses information other than the
Object Handle to locate the Original Object.  If the Original Object does not
exist, then the Shadow will not be Restored, since there is no Object to tie it
to.  In order to be sure that all of the Original Objects that should exist, do
exist, before an attempt is made to Restore a Shadow, MultiMaint does the
Restore of all non-Shadow Objects and then goes back and attempts the Restore
of all Shadow Objects.  This approach insures that the Shadow will get Restored
if it is possible on the Target Desktop.  It is still possible for the Restore
of the Shadow to fail if the Type of Restore is to do selected items and the
Original Object was not selected.

When an Object which has a Shadow is Restored to the Desktop, it is very
possible that the Object Handle for the Original Object will be different from
that saved in the Instance information for the Shadow.  Therefore, MultiMaint
keeps track of all of the Shadows for all Objects and when the Original Object
is Restored, MultiMaint checks the Instance information for all Shadows and
insures that the connection between the Original Object and all of the Shadows
is correct.

None of the above requires any action on the part of the user, however, it will
result in situations where the user asks for an Object to be Restored and,
because the Object has at least one Shadow, the Shadow Objects are Restored
automatically because of a change that would break the connection between the
Original Object and the Shadow on the Target Desktop.

See also:

o Types of Desktop Backup
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Help for Extended Attribute Name Matching ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Many of the Extended Attribute functions involve taking the Extended Attributes
from one set of files and/or directories and adding them to another set of
files and/or directories.  In order to do this, SysMaint must have a way of
deciding which files and directories match each other.  The basic way this is
done is by removing the base information from each path and doing the compare
on the remainder of the name.  For example, if the Extended Attributes for all
of the files and directories in the C:\OS2\SOURCE directory were to be copied
to the D:\TARGET directory, then the file C:\OS2\SOURCE\FILE.NME would be
determined to match D:\TARGET\FILE.NME and the Extended Attributes for the
FILE.NME file would be copied from one file to the other.  In addition, the
directory C:\OS2\SOURCE\SUBDIR1 would be determined to match D:\TARGET\SUBDIR1
and the directory Extended Attributes would be copied from one directory to the
other.

See also:

o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs
o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Help for What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint are powerful applications with the ability to
make many changes to the INI files, Extended Attributes and other items that
are vital to the normal operation of the Desktop.  Sometimes it is not
desirable to have a program that has this much power, even though both
applications are structured so that the default settings will not allow a user
to make any critical change without confirming that they want it done.

Sometimes the user simply does not want to take the chance that he will do
something that will cause a problem with his Desktop.  In other cases,
Corporations have many users that they simply do not want to have an
application that can cause a problem with the Desktop, since it can create
serious and time consuming support problems.

IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe are designed to address this problem for IniMaint,
MultiMaint and SysMaint users respectively.  IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
appear, as  as menus are concerned, exactly the same as IniMaint, MultiMaint
and SysMaint.  The sole difference is that all of the menu selections that
could cause a problem with the Desktop are deactivated.  Other than that, the
programs are the same.  If a user is using IniSafe, MltSafe or SysSafe and it
is desired to make some changes to their Desktop, all that is required is to
copy IniMaint, MultiMaint or SysMaint into the appropriate directory or to run
the program from a different directory on the LAN.  IniMaint, MultiMaint,
SysMaint, IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe use the same DLL and HLP files and the
operational entries in the INI files are fully compatible across all six
applications.

See also:

o Operational Environment
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Registration Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint are Copyrighted programs owned and supported
by:

                                 Larry J. Martin
                                Carry Associates
                               990 Ironwood Court
                           Marco Island FL 33937-4458
                                Tel: [phone]
                                Fax: [phone]
                             Compuserve: 72662,3616

Unregistered copies of IniMaint will display an initial dialog that will note
the unregistered condition.  This dialog will stay on the screen for 15
seconds, unless dismissed by clicking on the OK button.  The dialog cannot be
dismissed until it has been visible for 3 seconds.  In addition, the Title Bar
will contain a note that this is an unregistered version of IniMaint.
SysMaint, which includes the processing of the Extended Attributes and
MultiMaint which adds an Object by Object Desktop Backup and Restore capability
onto SysMaint, require a registered copy of IniMaint plus a registration ID for
SysMaint or MultiMaint. which is separate from the Registration ID for
IniMaint.  However, if a registered copy of SysMaint is purchased, then it will
include IniMaint. A registered copy of MultiMaint will include both SysMaint
and IniMaint.

IniMaint is the only one of the three products which is a Shareware product and
can, therefore, be tried without registering the program. Even if the version
of the code that is downloaded from and electronic source contains the code
necessary to run SysMaint and/or MultiMaint, it is not possible to get the menu
entries for these applications to appear in the Main Menu Window without the
Registration ID for the appropriate product.

To obtain your registration identifier for IniMaint please send a check for
29.95 per license for single licenses or 299.00 for an unlimited copies license
made payable to Carry Associates to the address above.  We will also invoice
against a Company Purchase Order and will accept payment via Visa or
Mastercard.

To obtain your registration identifier for SysMaint please send a check for
49.95 per license for single licenses or 499.00 for an unlimited copies license
made payable to Carry Associates to the address above.  We will also invoice
against a Company Purchase Order and will accept payment via Visa or
Mastercard.

To obtain your registration identifier for MultiMaint please send a check for
69.95 per license for single licenses or 699.00 for an unlimited copies license
made payable to Carry Associates to the address above.  We will also invoice
against a Company Purchase Order and will accept payment via Visa or
Mastercard.

If you are already a registered user of IniMaint and have purchased it prior to
the release of SysMaint, then you can upgrade from IniMaint to SysMaint for a
fee of 15.00 for a single license or 150.00 for an unlimited license.

If you are a registered user of IniMaint and purchased it after SysMaint was
released, then the upgrade fee is 25.00 for a single license and 250.00 for an
unlimited license.

If you are already a registered user of IniMaint and have purchased it prior to
the release of MultiMaint, then you can upgrade from IniMaint to MultiMaint for
a fee of 30.00 for a single license or 300.00 for an unlimited license.

If you are a registered user of IniMaint and purchased it after MultiMaint was
released, then the upgrade fee is 45.00 for a single license and 450.00 for an
unlimited license.

If you are already a registered user of SysMaint and have purchased it prior to
the release of MultiMaint, then you can upgrade from SysMaint to MultiMaint for
a fee of 15.00 for a single license or 150.00 for an unlimited license.

If you are a registered user of SysMaint and purchased it after MultiMaint was
released, then the upgrade fee is 25.00 for a single license and 250.00 for an
unlimited license.

If you want to register either IniMaint or SysMaint and would prefer to use a
credit card, you can register with either a Visa or Mastercard.

Once you have your registration identifier, you can register your copy of
IniMaint, MultiMaint or SysMaint by selecting the appropriate Register entry on
the Actions Menu.  Once you are registered, this entry will no longer appear on
the menu.

If you want a preregistered copy of IniMaint, MultiMaint or SysMaint, add $7.00
for postage and handling.  We will return a diskette with a preregistered copy
of IniMaint, MultiMaint or SysMaint, an Install CMD file and a registration ID.
The purpose of the ID is to allow preregistered users to download new versions,
register and use them until they can obtain a preregistered update.

The cost of a preregistered update is 10.00 per license for single licenses or
100.00 for an unlimited copies license, plus 7.00 handling and postage.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Help for Main Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MAIN WINDOW is the base of the IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint system.
When the program is started, this window appears listing the options available.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Recover
o Extended Attributes
o Desktop
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Help for Menu Items ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint Menu Items are:

o File
o Options
o Groups
o Actions
o Recover
o Size
o Find
o Extended Attributes
o Desktop

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Help for Popup Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pressing the Right Mouse Button when the Mouse Pointer is in the Application,
Key Name or Key Value windows will popup a Menu that contains action items that
can be done on the entries in that specific window.

Most of the items on the menus are the same as the items on the normal menus
and are described in the Help for that specific Menu. The Help for the
duplicated items is not included here.  However, there are three entries on the
Popup Menus that are unique to these menus and the Help for these items is
included here.

The IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint Special Popup Menu Items are:

o Write
o Print
o Explain

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Dialogs
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Help for Dialogs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dialogs for IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint are listed below:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog
o Dump Dialog
o Options Dialog
o Select Group Dialog
o Get Value or String Dialog
o Groups Dialog
o Find Dialog
o Compare Files Dialog
o Compare Files Write Options Dialog
o Repair File Dialog
o EA Test Dialog
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Explain Dialog
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Display and Modify Object Settings

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Actions
o Recover
o Extended Attributes
o Desktop
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. Help for Accelerator Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Accelerator Keys for IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint are listed below.

Key       Function

F1        Help

F3        Exit

F4        Refresh File

F5        Dump Variables

F6        Associate with *.INI

F7        Switch to User INI File

F8        Switch to System INI File

F9        New File

Ctrl-F1   Find Application Name

Ctrl-F2   Find Current Key Name

Ctrl-F3   Find Current Key Value

Ctrl-F4   Find Application Value

Ctrl-F5   Find Any Name

Ctrl-F6   Find Any Value

Ctrl-F7   Repeat Last Find

Ctrl-F11  Compare Files on Application Level

Ctrl-F8   Compare Files on Key Name Level

Ctrl-F9   Compare Files on Key Value Level

Alt-F1    Copy System INI File

Alt-F2    Copy User INI File

Alt-F3    Copy Both System and User INI Files

Ctrl-E    Size Entire File

Ctrl-S    Size Selected Application

Ctrl Alt-M Size System INI File

Ctrl Alt-N Size User INI File

Ctrl-G    Write Updated Key Value to INI File

Ctrl-D    Delete Selected Application

Ctrl-L    Delete Selected Key

Ctrl-M    Add Application

Ctrl-I    Add Key

Ctrl-R    Add or Replace Key Value

Ctrl-C    Rename Selected Application

Ctrl-W    Rename Selected Key

Ctrl-Z    Duplicate Selected Application

Ctrl-X    Duplicate Selected Key

Ctrl-A    Copy Selected Application

Ctrl-K    Copy Selected Key

Ctrl-V    Move Entire File

Ctrl-P    Move Selected Application

Ctrl-Y    Move Selected Key

Ctrl-T    Register Your Copy

Ctrl Alt-S Backup System INI File

Ctrl Alt-U Backup User INI File

Ctrl Alt-B Backup Both System and User INI Files

Ctrl-U    Change User INI File

Ctrl-H    Change System INI File

Ctrl-B    Change Both INI Files

Ctrl-F10  Repair File

Ctrl Alt-F4 Reset Non Write INI Files

Ctrl Alt-F5 Test for Non Write INI Files

Ctrl Alt-F1 EA Default Dialog

Ctrl Alt-F2 EA Describe Current File

Ctrl Alt-F3 EA Update File(s) from Current File

Ctrl Alt-D Desktop Defaults Dialog

Ctrl Alt-K Backup Desktop

Ctrl Alt-W Do Supplemental Backup

Ctrl Alt-V Select Supplemental Backup Files

Ctrl Alt-C Create Desktop Backup CMD File

Ctrl Alt-X Create Supplemental Backup CMD File

Ctrl Alt-O Create Desktop Restore CMD File

Ctrl Alt-Y Create Supplemental Restore CMD File

Ctrl Alt-R Reset WPS

Ctrl Alt-A Restore Desktop Directory

Ctrl Alt-I Restore Desktop ID

Ctrl Alt-F Restore Desktop INI Files

Ctrl Alt-Z Do Supplemental Restore

Ctrl Alt-P Portable Backup Defaults

Ctrl Alt-G Create Portable Backup

Ctrl Alt-H Do Portable Restore

Ctrl Alt-J Desktop Object Settings

Ctrl Alt-F6 Explain Current Selection

Ctrl Alt-F7 Write Window to File

Ctrl Alt-F8 Print Window

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Actions
o Recover
o Extended Attributes
o Desktop
o Dialogs
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Help for Additional Programs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Additional Programs for IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint are:

o IniCopy
o IniClean

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Actions
o Recover
o Extended Attributes
o Desktop
o Dialogs
o Accelerator Keys
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Help for IniCopy Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IniCopy Program is the program that is used by IniMaint to do the actual
COPY/MOVE operations.  This option is implemented as a separate program so that
the user will have the ability to make copies of INI files, including the User
and System INI files, at any time during the day.

The parameters expected by IniCopy are:

Required Parameters:

-Ifilename  - The fully qualified path and filename of the Source, Input, INI
file.

-Ofilename  - The fully qualified path and filename of the Target, Output, INI
file.  The Target will be created if it does not exist.

Optional Parameters:

-Fx     - Function requested - Default is C(opy) C = C(opy) M = M(ove)

-E      - COPY/MOVE Entire INI file - Default

-A      - COPY/MOVE All Groups

-Ggroup   - COPY/MOVE Specific Group

-Sapp    - COPY/MOVE Specific Application

-T      - Use Fast Copy.  This is only valid if -E is also specified

See also:

o Additional Programs
o IniClean


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. Help for IniClean Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IniClean Program is designed to remove the Desktop Directory Structure by
deleting the Desktop Directory, all Subdirectories, and all Files in all
Directories.

IniClean is not normally designed to be run as a stand alone program.  However,
it can be run to remove any Directory with it's Subdirectories and all files in
all Directories by passing the starting Directory as the only parameter.

For example, to delete the OS/2 Directory from drive C, all Subdirectories of
the OS/2 Directory and all Files in the OS/2 Directory and all Subdirectories
run IniClean as shown: IniClean -iC:\OS2

WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING

DO NOT RUN this program unless you are sure you know what you want to delete.
Once the program is started, it will delete all Directories and Files without
requiring or asking for any additional input.

WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING

See also:

o Additional Programs
o IniCopy


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Help for Application Listbox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The APPLICATION LISTBOX displays the list of applications that are in the
current INI file, whose name is on the Title Bar.

See also:

o Options Apps and Keys in Alpha Order


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Help for Key Listbox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The KEY LISTBOX displays the list of key names for the application that is
currently selected in the Application Listbox.

See also:

o Options Apps and Keys in Alpha Order


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Help for Key Data Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MLE WINDOW displays the value of key for the key that is currently selected
in the Key Listbox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Help for About ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select About on the Help pull down to display copyright information about
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint.

See also:

o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Help for Dump Variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Dump Variables to display a Dump Variables debugging dialog.  This
selection will allow the user to "dump" the program variables to a file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Help for Options Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Options to display an Options dialog.  This selection will allow the
user to change the various options that control whether the initial dialog will
be displayed and whether the user is to be asked before the current INI file is
updated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Help for Groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Groups to display a Groups dialog.  This selection will allow the user
to define, change and delete Application Groups


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 35. Help for File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select File to display a File  menu.  This selection will allow the user to do
a number of different file actions and Exit from IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint.  The File Menu Items are:

o New File
o User INI File Selection
o System INI File Selection
o Recall Files
o Refresh File
o Compare Files
o Exit
o Dump Variables

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Recover
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 36. Help for Actions Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Actions to display an Actions menu.  This selection will allow the user
to make various changes to the current INI file.  The Actions Menu Items are:

o Update Current Key Value
o Delete Application
o Delete Key
o Add Application
o Add Key to Application
o Add or Replace Key Value
o Rename Key
o Duplicate Key
o Rename Application
o Duplicate Application
o Copy Application(s)
o Move Application(s)
o Backup INI File(s)
o Register Your Copy

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Recover
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 37. Help for Recover Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Recover to display a Recover menu.  This selection will allow the user
to do various things to recover from problems with various INI files.  The
Recover Menu Items are:

o Change User INI File
o Change System INI File
o Change Both INI Files
o Repair INI File
o Condense INI Files
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Test for Non Write INI Files

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Actions
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 38. Help for EA Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Ext. Att. to display the EA menu.  This selection will allow the user to
do various things with the Extended Attributes for Directories and/or Files.
The EA Menu Items are:

o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 39. Help for Desktop Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Desktop. to display the Desktop menu.  This selection will allow the
user to do various things with the OS/2 Desktop.  The Desktop Menu Items are:

o Defaults Dialog
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Reset Desktop
o Backup Desktop
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Create Backup CMD File
o Create Supplemental Backup CMD File
o Create Restore CMD File
o Create Supplemental Restore CMD File
o Restore Desktop ID
o Restore Desktop Directory
o Restore Desktop INI Files
o Do Supplemental Restore
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Create Portable Backup
o Do Portable Restore
o Desktop Object Settings
o Display Backup Descriptions

See also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 40. Help for Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Size to display the number of bytes of disk storage that would be
required to hold all or part of the current INI file, the System INI file or
the User INI File.

The user will be presented with a Size submenu that will allow the selection of
what to Size.

The selection Dialog will always contain four entries, one for the entire file,
one for the currently selected Application, one for the System INI file and one
for the User INI File.  If there are any Groups defined for the current INI
file, then the Groups will also be listed.  If there are more than on Group
defined for the current INI file, then an All Groups selection will be
displayed.  Once the selection is made, the Size calculation will commence.
There will be a Calculating Box displayed until the calculation completes.

See also:

o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Display Size in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 41. Help for Find Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Find to display a Find menu.  This selection will allow the user to do a
number of different find actions.  The Find Menu Items are:

o Find Application Name
o Find Current Key Name
o Find Current Key Value
o Find Application Key Value
o Find Any Key Name
o Find Any Key Value
o Repeat Last Find

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Recover
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 42. Help for Write Window Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write to Write the contents of the Window under the Mouse Pointer to a
File.  The user will be asked to select the Target File via the Standard File
Dialog.  Once the File is selected, the Window contents will be written to the
file or, if the file already exists, appended to the current contents of the
file.

There will be a Header line with the Date and Time.  If the window being
written is the Key Name or Key Value window, then the currently selected
Application will be included in the Header.  If the window being written is the
Key Value window, then the currently selected Key Name will also be included in
the Heading information.

See also:

o Print
o Explain
o Explain Dialog
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Recover
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 43. Help for Print Window Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Print to Print the contents of the Window under the Mouse Pointer.

There will be a Header line with the Date and Time.  If the window being
printed is the Key Name or Key Value window, then the currently selected
Application will be included in the Header.  If the window being printed is the
Key Value window, then the currently selected Key Name will also be included in
the Heading information.

See also:

o Write
o Explain
o Explain Dialog
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Recover
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 44. Help for Explain ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Explain to popup a Dialog with an Explanation of the meaning and use of
the currently selected Application and Key for those Applications that are
recognized as standard OS/2 Applications.

If the currently selected Application is not known, then the Dialog will simply
state that fact.

If the Mouse Pointer is over the Application Window when the Explain is
requested, then the Dialog will only contain a general explanation of the use
of the Application.  If the Mouse Pointer is over the Key Name or Key Value
windows, then an attempt will be made to give additional explanation
information on the currently selected Key.  The amount of information available
depends on a number of things, not the least of which is Carry Associates
current level of knowledge about the various entries.  Therefore, there is no
general way to characterize what the more detailed Explanation.  It will vary
from nothing to a detailed list of items.

Carry Associates expects that this will be a continually evolving area and we
will make every attempt to include everything we learn about the INI files in
the Explain text.  We would be very happy to hear from any user who has
additional information that could help.

We can be reached via any of the following:

                                 Larry J. Martin
                                Carry Associates
                               990 Ironwood Court
                           Marco Island FL 33937-4458
                                Tel: [phone]
                                Fax: [phone]
                             Compuserve: 72662,3616

See also:

o Print
o Write
o Explain Dialog
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an IniMaint Group?
o What does Repair Do?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o General Info About IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
o Getting Started
o What are IniSafe, MltSafe and SysSafe
o General Help Information
o Main Window
o Application Listbox
o Key Listbox
o Key Data Window
o Menu Items
o Popup Menus
o Dialogs
o Recover
o Accelerator Keys
o Additional Programs
o Registration Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 45. Help for Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Exit on the File pull down or press F3 to leave IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint.

Selecting Exit will shutdown all open "threads" before actually exiting the
program so there may be a slight delay.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 46. Help for New File Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select New File to display a Files dialog.  This selection will allow the user
change the current INI file.

See also:

o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o User INI File Selection
o System INI File Selection
o Recall Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 47. Help for User INI File Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select User INI File to make the User INI File the current file being displayed
by IniMaint.  The User INI File is normally OS2.INI.

See also:

o New File Selection
o System INI File Selection
o Recall Files
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 48. Help for System INI File Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select System INI File to make the System INI File the current file being
displayed by IniMaint.  The System INI File is normally OS2SYS.INI.

See also:

o New File Selection
o User INI File Selection
o Recall Files
o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 49. Help for File Refresh ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Refresh File to cause IniMaint to reload the contents of the current INI
file from disk.  This entry would be used if some event has occurred that may
have modified the current INI file and it is desired that these changes be
reflected in the IniMaint listboxes and value area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 50. Help for Compare Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Compare Files to compare two different INI files on any one of three
different levels.  The Source File will be the Current INI file.  The user will
be prompted for the Target File.

If the Application Level Compare is selected the Listbox in the Compare Dialog
will list all Application Names that are in one INI file, but not in the other.

If the Key Name Level Compare is selected the Listbox in the Compare Dialog
will list everything that the Application Name Level lists plus all
Application/Key Names that are in one INI file, but not in the other.

If the Key Value Level Compare is selected the Listbox in the Compare Dialog
will list everything in the other two Levels lists plus all Application/Key
Names that are in both INI files, but have Unequal Key Values.

See also:

o Compare Files Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 51. Help for Recall Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Recall Files will display a submenu with a list of previous INI and/or
EA files that have been the current file.  If any of these files are selected,
that file will become the current file and all of the windows will be updated.
The maximum number of files displayed in the Recall Submenu is a user option
that is set in the Options Dialog.

See also:

o Options Recall Files
o New File Selection


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 52. Help for Update Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Update Current Key to write any changes made to the selected key value
to the current INI file.  Until this option is selected or a new Key or
Application is selected and the user chooses to allow an update, the changes
made to the Key Value in the bottom window will not be reflected in the current
INI file.

See also:

o Ask Before Change


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 53. Help for Delete Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete Application to Delete the Currently Selected Application.  Unless
the Option has been turned off, the user will be asked to confirm that the
Application should be deleted.

See also:

o Ask Before Delete


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 54. Help for Delete Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete Key to Delete the Currently Selected Key.  Unless the Option has
been turned off, the user will be asked to confirm that the Key should be
deleted.

See also:

o Ask Before Delete


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 55. Help for Add Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add Application to Add a New Application to the current INI File.  This
Selection will ask the user for the name of the New Application.  Once the name
is verified, this Selection will fall through to the Add Key Selection.

See also:

o Add Key
o Add or Replace Key Value


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 56. Help for Add Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add Key to Add a New Key to the current Application This Selection will
ask the user for the name of the New Key.  Once the name is verified, this
Selection will fall through to the Replace Key Selection.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 57. Help for Add or Replace Key Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Add or Replace Key Value to display a Dialog that will allow the user to
modify the Value of the current Key.  This is the only Selection that will
allow the user to change the length of a Key Value.  The bottom Window of the
Main Window can be used to modify the Value of a Key, but it cannot be used to
change the length of a Value.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 58. Help for Rename Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Rename Key to Rename the Currently Selected Key.  The old Key Name will
no longer exist in the Current INI file.  If you want to retain the old Key
Name use Duplicate Key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 59. Help for Duplicate Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Duplicate Application to Duplicate the Currently Selected Application
using a different Application Name.  The user will first be prompted to enter a
New Application Name, then all Key Names and Key Values will be duplicated
under the new Application.

No check is made to insure that the New Application Name is not a duplicate of
an existing Application.  If the New Application is a duplicate then the effect
of executing this item will be to copy every Key Name from the Selected
Application to the New Application. If the Key Name already exists in the New
Application, the Value will be replaced by the Value from the Selected
Application.  If the Key Name does not exist in the New Application, then it
will be inserted into the New Application.

The old Application will still exist in the Current INI file.  If you do not
want to retain the old Application then the Delete Application  item on the
Action Menu can be used to delete the old Application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 60. Help for Rename Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Rename Application to Rename the Currently Selected Application using a
different Application Name. The user will first be prompted to enter a New
Application Name, then all Key Names and Key Values will be copied to new
Application.

No check is made to insure that the New Application Name is not a duplicate of
an existing Application.  If the New Application is a duplicate then the effect
of executing this item will be to copy every Key Name from the Selected
Application to the New Application.  If the Key Name already exists in the New
Application, the Value will be replaced by the Value from the Selected
Application.  If the Key Name does not exist in the New Application, then it
will be inserted into the New Application.

The old Application will no longer exist in the Current INI file.  If you want
to retain the old Application use Duplicate Application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 61. Help for Duplicate Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Duplicate Key to Duplicate the Currently Selected Key Value using a
different Key Name and, optionally, a different Application Name.  The user
will first be prompted to enter a New Application Name and can either change
the Application or leave it the same.  If the Application Name is changed, then
the Key Name does not need to be changed and the Key Value will be copied to
the new Application using the current Key Name.  If the Application Name is not
changed, then Key Name must be changed. The old Key Name will still exist in
the Current INI file.  If you do not want to retain the old Key Name use Rename
Key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 62. Help for Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Copy to Copy one or more Applications from the current INI file to a
Target INI File, to make a copy of the System INI File, the User INI File or
Both the System and User INI Files.

The user will first be asked to select a Target for the Copy and will be
presented with a Copy submenu that will allow the selection of what to Copy.

The submenu will always contain five entries, one for the entire file, one for
the currently selected Application and one each for the System, User and Both
INI Files.  If there are any Groups defined for the current INI file, then the
Groups will also be listed.  If there are more than on Group defined for the
current INI file, then an All Groups selection will be displayed.  Once the
selection is made, the Copy will commence.  There will be a Copy in Progress
Box displayed until the Copy completes.

See also:

o Options Use Fast Copy
o Select Group
o Display Copy in Progress
o Explanation of System and User INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 63. Help for Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Backup to make a backup copy of either the System INI File, the User INI
file or both the System and User INI Files.  In order to backup these files a
target file must be chosen for each source file.  If no target has been
specified or if the Option to Ask Before Backup is set, the user will be asked
to specify a target file for the backup.  Once a target is specified for the
System and/or User INI Files, then the user will not be asked to verify the
target filename if the Ask Before Backup Option is not set.

If the target backup file already exists, it will be erased before the backup
is done.  This is necessary to insure that the backup does not contain old
information.

If the option to display a copy in progress is set there will be a Copy in
Progress Box displayed until the Copy completes.

See also:

o Options Use Fast Copy
o Options Ask Before Backup
o Display Copy in Progress
o Explanation of System and User INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 64. Help for Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Move to Move one or more Applications from the current INI file to a
Target INI File.

The user will first be asked to select a Target for the Move and will be
presented with a Move submenu that will allow the selection of what to Move.

The submenu will always contain two entries, one for the entire file and
another for the currently selected Application.  If there are any Groups
defined for the current INI file, then the Groups will also be listed.  If
there are more than on Group defined for the current INI file, then an All
Groups selection will be displayed.  Once the selection is made, the Move will
commence.  There will be a Move in Progress Box displayed until the Move
completes.  Once the Move is complete, the Moved Applications will be deleted
from the Current INI file.

See also:

o Options Use Fast Copy
o Select Group
o Display Move in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 65. Help for Change User INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change User INI File to change to a new User INI File. The normal User
INI file is OS2.INI.  Normally this would only be done because the user was
having trouble deleting an entry from the User INI file, therefore, changing
files would be part of a multiple step process:

CAUTION:
It is Strongly Suggested that you have a safe backup of your INI files before
you attempt to use this capability.  In addition insure that you know what you
are doing before you attempt to make changes that OS/2 would not allow you to
make.  It is possible that the actions described below will be successful and
still leave you in a condition that will cause you problems.

Note:  When you change either the User or System INI files, your Desktop will
       revert back to the Desktop at Boot time.  Currently running PM
       Applications will continue to run.  Currently, the effect on files being
       printed by the Spooler is not known.  It is suggested that you insure
       that the Spooler is not doing anything when you change the User or
       System INI files.

In addition, the switch of the User and System INI files will not persist
across booting of OS/2.  In other words, if you change either of the files and
then re-boot, you will go back to the original User and System INI files.
Therefore, changing one of the files, then deleting a critical entry and
re-booting before you replace the critical entry will cause unknown, but almost
invariably bad, events to occur and could result in a system that will not boot
at all.

 1. Insure that IniMaint was using the current User INI File.
 2. Use the COPY IniMaint function to make a Copy of the current User INI File.
 3. Select this entry to change the User INI file to the Copy.
 4. Use the DELETE or MOVE  ability of IniMaint to modify the old User INI
    File, which will still be the current IniMaint INI File.
 5. Select this entry again to make the changed file the User INI file.  If an
    error is encountered when an attempt is made to switch back, then you must
    use the IniMaint COPY function to Copy any Applications you modified from
    the Copy to the original File until you can switch back successfully.

See also:

o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Change System INI File
o Change Both INI Files
o Condense INI Files
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Test for Non Write INI Files
o Ask Before Switch INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 66. Help for Change System INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change System INI File to change to a new System INI File.  The normal
System INI file is OS2SYS.INI.  Normally this would only be done because the
user was having trouble deleting an entry from the System INI file, therefore,
changing files would be part of a multiple step process:

CAUTION:
It is Strongly Suggested that you have a safe backup of your INI files before
you attempt to use this capability.  In addition insure that you know what you
are doing before you attempt to make changes that OS/2 would not allow you to
make.  It is possible that the actions described below will be successful and
still leave you in a condition that will cause you problems.

i

Note:  When you change either the User or System INI files, your Desktop will
       revert back to the Desktop at Boot time. Currently running PM
       Applications will continue to run. Currently, the effect on files being
       printed by the Spooler is not known.  It is suggested that you insure
       that the Spooler is not doing anything when you change the User or
       System INI files.

In addition, the switch of the User and System INI files will not persist
across booting of OS/2.  In other words, if you change either of the files and
then re-boot, you will go back to the original User and System INI files.
Therefore, changing one of the files, then deleting a critical entry and
re-booting before you replace the critical entry will cause unknown, but almost
invariably bad, events to occur and could result in a system that will not boot
at all.

 1. Insure that IniMaint was using the current System INI File.
 2. Use the COPY IniMaint function to make a Copy of the current System INI
    File.
 3. Select this entry to change the System INI file to the Copy.
 4. Use the DELETE or MOVE ability of IniMaint to modify the old System INI
    File, which will still be the current IniMaint INI File.
 5. Select this entry again to make the changed file the System INI file.  If
    an error is encountered when an attempt is made to switch back, then you
    must use the IniMaint COPY function to Copy any Applications you modified
    from the Copy to the original File until you can switch back successfully.

See also:

o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Change Both INI Files
o Change User INI Files
o Condense INI Files
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Test for Non Write INI Files
o Ask Before Switch INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 67. Help for Change User INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Change Both INI Files to change to a new User INI File and a new System
INI File.  The normal User INI file is OS2.INI.  The normal System INI file is
OS2SYS.INI.  Normally this would only be done because the user was having
trouble deleting an entry from the User INI file, therefore, changing files
would be part of a multiple step process:

CAUTION:
It is Strongly Suggested that you have a safe backup of your INI files before
you attempt to use this capability.  In addition insure that you know what you
are doing before you attempt to make changes that OS/2 would not allow you to
make.  It is possible that the actions described below will be successful and
still leave you in a condition that will cause you problems.

Note:  When you change either the User or System INI files, your Desktop will
       revert back to the Desktop at Boot time.  Currently running PM
       Applications will continue to run.  Currently, the effect on files being
       printed by the Spooler is not known.  It is suggested that you insure
       that the Spooler is not doing anything when you change the User or
       System INI files.

In addition, the switch of the User and System INI files will not persist
across booting of OS/2.  In other words, if you change either of the files and
then re-boot, you will go back to the original User and System INI files.
Therefore, changing one of the files, then deleting a critical entry and
re-booting before you replace the critical entry will cause unknown, but almost
invariably bad, events to occur and could result in a system that will not boot
at all.

 1. Insure that IniMaint was using the current User INI File.
 2. Use the COPY IniMaint function to make a Copy of the current User INI File.
 3. Change IniMaint to the current System INI File.
 4. Use the COPY IniMaint function to make a Copy of the current System INI
    File.
 5. Select this entry to change Both INI files to the Copies.
 6. Use the DELETE or MOVE ability of IniMaint to modify the old User and
    System INI Files. File.
 7. Select this entry again to make the changed files the User and System INI
    file.  If an error is encountered when an attempt is made to switch back,
    then you must use the IniMaint COPY function to Copy any Applications you
    modified from the Copy to the original File until you can switch back
    successfully.

See also:

o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Change System INI File
o Change User INI Files
o Condense INI Files
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Test for Non Write INI Files
o Ask Before Switch INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 68. Help for Repair INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Repair INI File to have the currently available Repair actions performed
on the appropriate INI File.  A dialog will be displayed that gives the user
the ability to select the Type of Repair and which of the available Repair
Checks they want done.  If a Repair Type is chosen that will actually remove
items from the Current INI file, a Save INI file must be chosen and anything
removed from or changed in the Current file will be written to the Save file.

See also:

o Repair File Dialog
o What does Repair Do?
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 69. Help for Condense INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Condense to Condense one or more INI files.  Whenever a change is made
to any INI file the space used by to old version of the changed data is marked
unused.  Even though this space should be reclaimed when subsequent changes are
made, any INI file that has a lot of activity will tend to accumulate a large
amount of fragmented and unused space.  The only way to reclaim this space to
to use the Prf APIs to copy the contents of the INI file to another file, erase
the old file and copy the contents back, this entry accomplishes this task.

In addition, for the System INI file, OS2SYS.INI, and the User INI file,
OS2.INI, there is an additional complication.  The existing file cannot be
erased as long as it is the System or User INI file currently being used by
OS/2.  However, there is an Prf API that can change the current System or User
INI file to another file.  IniMaint uses these APIs to change the files so that
it can delete the normal System or User INI files.  That way, when these files
are recovered, they have the same name, but all the extra unused space has been
removed.

Note:  Because of a change in the way that the INI files are updated in OS/2
V2.1 and beyond, the Condense is no longer needed for these versions and will
not appear on any of the Menus.  V2.1 and beyond update the INI files so that
there is never any empty space in the files, so the Condense would no
accomplish anything.

CAUTION:
It is Strongly Suggested that you have a safe backup of your INI files before
you attempt to use this capability.  In addition, it is Extremely Important
that you not  the Condense or you can leave your desktop in an indeterminate
condition.  The primary reason that a backup is recommended is because it is
possible for some external event, such as a power failure, to occur during the
Condense and this will require that you go back to the backup copies.

CAUTION:
If you are Condensing either the System or User INI files, you should not make
any modifications to your desktop during the Condense.  Depending on the timing
of the changes you could end up with the modifications being wiped out  during
the restore portion of the Condense or, even worse, the modification could end
up partially reflected in the Condensed files resulting in unexpected, but
invariably bad events.

The user will first be asked to select a Temporary INI file that will be used
to temporarily hold the contents of the INI file being Condensed.  This should
be a file that does not currently exist.  If the file does exist, the contents
will be destroyed but the user will receive a warning and have an opportunity
to cancel the Condense of the file if they wish to use a different Temporary
file.

The submenu shows the different files that can be Condensed.

See also:

o What is an INI File?
o Explanation of System and User INI Files
o Options Use Fast Copy
o Change User INI File
o Change System INI File
o Change Both INI Files
o Copy Application(s)
o Backup INI File(s)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 70. Help for Reset Non Write INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Reset Non Write INI Files to have the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files
changed from a condition where they cannot be updated back to a normal
condition.  This menu item is not normally needed, since IniMaint, MultiMaint
and SysMaint will both recognize when the INI files cannot be written to and
will automatically notify the user and ask them if they want the condition
corrected.  However, if a user has chosen to have IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint store their operational information in a file other than the OS2.INI
file, then this condition would not be recognized unless the user chose to make
a change to the OS2.INI or OS2SYS.INI files.  For this reason, a facility that
would allow the user to manually fix the situation has been added here.

See also:

o What is an INI File?
o Test for Non Write INI Files
o Non Write INI Files
o Automatic Repair of Non Write INI Files
o Operational Environment
o Explanation of System and User INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 71. Help for Test for Non Write INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Test for Non Write INI Files to have the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files
tested to see if they can be updated.  This menu item is not normally needed,
since IniMaint, MultiMaint and SysMaint will both recognize when the INI files
cannot be written to and will automatically notify the user and ask them if
they want the condition corrected.  However, if a user has chosen to have
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint store their operational information in a file
other than the OS2.INI file, then this condition would not be recognized unless
the user chose to make a change to the OS2.INI or OS2SYS.INI files.  For this
reason, a facility that would allow the user to manually make the same test has
been added here.

See also:

o What is an INI File?
o Reset Non Write INI Files
o Non Write INI Files
o Automatic Repair of Non Write INI Files
o Operational Environment
o Explanation of System and User INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 72. Help for Describe EA File Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Describe EA File Contents to display a Message Box that will describe
the root Directory or File that was used to create the current displayed set of
Extended Attributes, what is included in terms of Files and Directories and
whether Subdirectories were also searched.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 73. Help for Update EAs from the Current File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Update EAs from the Current File to Update the actual Extended
Attributes for the Files and/or Directories that are in the currently displayed
file.

This would normally be used if a set of Extended Attributes were Edited, had
been modified by the user and the user now wanted the modified Extended
Attributes Joined to the actual Files and/or Directories.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 74. Help for View Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select View to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can be viewed. Once one of the submenu selections are made,
the user will be presented with an appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that
will allow the selection of the Root for the View.  Once the Root is selected a
file name will be built to hold the Extended Attributes.  This name can be
built automatically or can be selected by the user depending on the appropriate
Default option.  If the file already exists it will be overwritten
automatically or the user will be asked if they want it overwritten, based on
the appropriate Default Option.  Once all of this is done the Extended
Attributes for the Directories and/or Files will be extracted and placed in the
selected EA file Once the EAs have all been processed, the EA file will appear
as the current INI file.

The Application Listbox will contain the names of the Directories and/or Files
that have been found.

The Key Listbox will contain the List of EAs for the Directory or File that is
currently selected in the Application Listbox.

The Key Value window will contain the actual data for the EA.

If the Default option Keep Temporary Files is not checked, then the user will
never be asked for an Extended Attribute Filename, since the created file will
be automatically deleted as soon as the View is completed.  In addition, the
generated filename will not be placed in the File Recall list, since it does
not make sense to Recall a file that has been deleted.

Refer to the Whatisea.txt file for a more complete description of how the
Extended Attributes are displayed.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Ask for EA Filename
o Keep Temporary Files
o Overwrite Existing Files
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 75. Help for Test Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Test to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can be tested. Once one of the submenu selections are made,
the user will be presented with an appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that
will allow the selection of the Root for the Test.  Once the Root is selected
the Extended Attributes for the Directories and/or Files will be examined and a
Dialog will appear listing each File and/or Directory along with a notation as
to whether the Extended Attributes are Valid or, if they are not Valid, what
error was found.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Test Dialog
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 76. Help for Save Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Save to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can have their Extended Attributes saved.  Once one of the
submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an appropriate
File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the Root for the
Save.  Once the Root is selected a file name will be built to hold the Extended
Attributes.  This name can be built automatically or can be selected by the
user depending on the appropriate Default option.  If the file already exists
it will be overwritten automatically or the user will be asked if they want it
overwritten, based on the appropriate Default Option.  Once all of this is done
the Extended Attributes for the Directories and/or Files will be extracted and
placed in the selected EA file.  The actual Extended Attributes of the Source
Files and/or Directories will not be altered.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 77. Help for Copy Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Copy to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can have their Extended Attributes copied.  Once one of the
submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an appropriate
File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the Source Root
for the Copy.  Once the Source Root is selected the user will be presented with
an appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the
Target Root for the Copy.  Once the Target Root is selected the Extended
Attributes for the Source Directories and/or Files will be extracted and Copied
to the File or Directory that has the same name in the Target.  The Extended
Attributes of the Source Files and/or Directories will be not be modified so
that after the Copy these Files and/or Directories will have the same Extended
Attributes as before the Copy.

For example, if the Extended Attributes for Files were Copied from a Directory
\SOURCE on Drive D to a Directory \TARGET on Drive E, and there was a file
SOMESTUF.TXT in both Directories, then the Extended Attributes for the file in
the Source Directory would be copied to the same file in the Target.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 78. Help for Move Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Move to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can have their Extended Attributes moved.  Once one of the
submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an appropriate
File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the Source Root
for the Move.  Once the Source Root is selected the user will be presented with
an appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the
Target Root for the Move.  Once the Target Root is selected the Extended
Attributes for the Source Directories and/or Files will be extracted and Moved
to the File or Directory that has the same name in the Target.  The Extended
Attributes of the Source Files and/or Directories will be Deleted so that after
the Move these Files and/or Directories will not have any Extended Attributes.

For example, if the Extended Attributes for Files were Moved from a Directory
\SOURCE on Drive D to a Directory \TARGET on Drive E, and there was a file
SOMESTUF.TXT in both Directories, then the Extended Attributes for the file in
the Source Directory would be Moved to the same file in the Target.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 79. Help for Split Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Split to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can have their Extended Attributes split.  Once one of the
submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an appropriate
File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the Root for the
Split.  Once the Root is selected a file name will be built to hold the
Extended Attributes.  This name can be built automatically or can be selected
by the user depending on the appropriate Default option.  If the file already
exists it will be overwritten automatically or the user will be asked if they
want it overwritten, based on the appropriate Default Option.  Once all of this
is done the Extended Attributes for the Directories and/or Files will be
extracted and placed in the selected EA file.  The actual Extended Attributes
of the Source Files and/or Directories will be deleted and these Files and/or
Directories will no longer have any Extended Attributes.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 80. Help for Delete Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Delete to display the submenu that lists the different set of
Directories and/or Files that can have their Extended Attributes deleted.  Once
one of the submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an
appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the
Root for the Delete.  The actual Extended Attributes of the Source Files and/or
Directories will be deleted and these Files and/or Directories will no longer
have any Extended Attributes.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 81. Help for Join Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Join to display the submenu that lists the different set of Directories
and/or Files that can have their Extended Attributes Joined.  Once one of the
submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an appropriate
File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the Root for the
Join.  Once the Root is selected the Extended Attributes in the Current File
will be Joined to any Files and/or Directories in the Target that have the same
name as a corresponding File or Directory in the Current File.

This function is very similar to the Update EA's from the Current File except
that the Extended Attributes can be Joined to a set of Files and/or Directories
different from the original ones.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 82. Help for Compare Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Compare to Compare the Extended Attributes for one set of Files and/or
Directories to those current on another set of Files and/or Directories.  When
this selection is made the first action is to display the submenu that lists
the different set of Directories and/or Files that can be compared.  Once one
of the submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an
appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the
Source Root for the Compare.  Once the Source Root is selected the user will be
presented with an appropriate File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the
selection of the Target Root for the Compare.  Once the Target Root is selected
a file name will be built to hold the Source Extended Attributes.  This name
can be built automatically or can be selected by the user depending on the
appropriate Default option.  If the file already exists it will be overwritten
automatically or the user will be asked if they want it overwritten, based on
the appropriate Default Option.  Then a file name will be built to hold the
Target Extended Attributes.  This name can be built automatically or can be
selected by the user depending on the appropriate Default option.  If the file
already exists it will be overwritten automatically or the user will be asked
if they want it overwritten, based on the appropriate Default Option.  Once all
of this is done the Compare Dialog will appear and do a Key Value level Compare
of the Extended Attribute information between the Source and Target.  Once the
Compare is completed, the files that contain the Extended Attributes will be
deleted if the user has selected this Default Option.

If the Default option Keep Temporary Files is not checked, then the user will
never be asked for an Extended Attribute Filename, since the created file will
be automatically deleted as soon as the View is completed.  In addition, the
generated filename will not be placed in the File Recall list, since it does
not make sense to Recall a file that has been deleted.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Ask for EA Filename
o Keep Temporary Files
o Overwrite Existing Files
o Compare Files Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 83. Help for Compare to Saved Extended Attributes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Compare to Saved to Compare the Extended Attributes that are currently
on a set of Files and/or Directories to those that have already been saved in
an EA file.  For example, this entry would be used to compare the current
Extended Attributes for a set of Files and/or Directories to those saved
previously, in order to see what kinds of changes have occurred. When this
selection is made the first action is to display the submenu that lists the
different set of Directories and/or Files that can be compared.  Once one of
the submenu selections are made, the user will be presented with an appropriate
File/Directory/Drive Dialog that will allow the selection of the Source Root
for the Compare.  Once the Source Root is selected the user will be presented
with a File Dialog that will allow the selection of the Target EA File for the
Compare.  Once the Target Root is selected a file name will be built to hold
the Source Extended Attributes.  This name can be built automatically or can be
selected by the user depending on the appropriate Default option.  If the file
already exists it will be overwritten automatically or the user will be asked
if they want it overwritten, based on the appropriate Default Option.  Once all
of this is done the Compare Dialog will appear and do a Key Value level Compare
of the Extended Attribute information between the Source and Target.  Once the
Compare is completed, the files that contain the Source Extended Attributes
will be deleted if the user has selected this Default Option.

If the Default option Keep Temporary Files is not checked, then the user will
never be asked for an Extended Attribute Filename, since the created file will
be automatically deleted as soon as the View is completed.  In addition, the
generated filename will not be placed in the File Recall list, since it does
not make sense to Recall a file that has been deleted.

The following File and Path Combinations can be Selected:

o Extended Attribute Name Matching
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Ask for EA Filename
o Keep Temporary Files
o Overwrite Existing Files
o Compare Files Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Update EAs from the Current File
o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 84. Help for Select EAs for a Single File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for File to display the Extended Attributes for a single file.  A
File Selection Dialog will be displayed allowing the user to select the file.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 85. Help for Select EAs for a Single Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for Path to display the Extended Attributes for a single directory.
A File Selection Dialog will be displayed allowing the user to select the
directory.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 86. Help for Select EAs for all Files in Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Files in Directory to display the Extended Attributes for
all the Files in a single Subdirectory.  A File Selection Dialog will be
displayed allowing the user to select the Root Directory to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 87. Help for Select EAs for all Directories in Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Directories in Directory to display the Extended Attributes
for all the Directories in a single Subdirectory.  A File Selection Dialog will
be displayed allowing the user to select the Root Directory to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 88. Help for Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory to display the Extended
Attributes for all the Files and Directories in a single Subdirectory.  A File
Selection Dialog will be displayed allowing the user to select the Root
Directory to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 89. Help for Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory to display the Extended
Attributes for all the Files in a single Directory and all of it's
Subdirectories.  A File Selection Dialog will be displayed allowing the user to
select the Root Directory to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 90. Help for Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory to display the
Extended Attributes for all the Directories in a single Directory and all of
it's Subdirectories.  A File Selection Dialog will be displayed allowing the
user to select the Root Directory to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 91. Help for Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory to
display the Extended Attributes for all the Files and Directories in a single
Directory and all of it's Subdirectories.  A File Selection Dialog will be
displayed allowing the user to select the Root Directory to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 92. Help for Select EAs for all Files on Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Files on Drive to display the Extended Attributes for all
the Files on a Drive.  A Drive Selection Dialog will be displayed allowing the
user to select the Drive to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 93. Help for Select EAs for all Directories on Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Directories on Drive to display the Extended Attributes for
all the Directories on a Drive.  A Drive Selection Dialog will be displayed
allowing the user to select the Drive to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 94. Help for Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select EAs for all Files and Directories on Drive to display the Extended
Attributes for all the Files and Directories on a Drive.  A Drive Selection
Dialog will be displayed allowing the user to select the Drive to use.

The associated Menu Items are:

o View EAs
o Test EAs
o Save EAs
o Copy EAs
o Move EAs
o Split EAs
o Delete EAs
o Join EAs
o Compare EAs
o Compare to Saved EAs

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA Defaults Dialog
o Describe EA File Contents
o Select EAs for a Single File
o Select EAs for a Single Path
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory
o Select EAs for all Files in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files and Directories in Directory and Subdirectory
o Select EAs for all Files on Drive
o Select EAs for all Directories on Drive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 95. Help for Find Application Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Application Name on the Find menu to do a Find on the entries in the
Application Listbox.  If the Find is successful the Application Name will be
Selected and the Listbox will be scrolled to insure the found name is visible.

See also:

o Repeat Last Find
o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 96. Help for Find Current Key Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Current Key Name on the Find menu to do a Find on the entries in the
Current Key Listbox.  If the Find is successful the Current Key Name will be
Selected and the Listbox will be scrolled to insure the found name is visible.

See also:

o Find Any Key Name
o Repeat Last Find
o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 97. Help for Find Current Key Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Current Key Value on the Find menu to do a Find on the entries in the
Current Key Value MLE.  If the Find is successful the Current Key Value will be
Selected and the MLE will be scrolled to insure the found value is visible.

See also:

o Find Application Key Value
o Find Any Key Value
o Repeat Last Find
o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 98. Help for Find Application Key Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Application Key Value on the Find menu to do a Find on all of the Key
Values for the current Application.  If the Find is successful the Current Key
Name will be Selected, the Listbox will be scrolled to insure the selected Name
is visible, the found Key Value will be loaded into the Key Value MLE, and the
Key Value MLE will be scrolled to insure the found Value is visible.

See also:

o Find Current Key Value
o Find Any Key Value
o Repeat Last Find
o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 99. Help for Find Any Key Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Any Key Name on the Find menu to do a Find on all of the Key Names in
the current INI file.  If the Find is successful the Application that contains
the Key Name will be selected in the Application Listbox, the Application
Listbox will be scrolled to insure the selected Application is visible, the Key
Names will be loaded into the Key Listbox, the Current Key Name will be
Selected and the Listbox will be scrolled to insure the found Name is visible.

See also:

o Find Current Key Name
o Repeat Last Find
o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 100. Help for Find Any Key Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Any Key Value on the Find menu to do a Find on all of the Key Values in
the current INI file.  If the Find is successful the Application that contains
the Key Value will be selected in the Application Listbox, the Application
Listbox will be scrolled to insure the selected Application is visible, the Key
Names will be loaded into the Key Listbox, the Current Key Name will be
Selected, the Listbox will be scrolled to insure the selected Name is visible,
the found Key Value will be loaded into the Key Value MLE, and the Key Value
MLE will be scrolled to insure the found Value is visible.

See also:

o Find Current Key Value
o Find Application Key Value
o Repeat Last Find
o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 101. Help for Repeat Last Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Repeat Last Find on the Find menu to Repeat the Last Find that was
requested. This item is really a short hand way to Repeat a Find and has been
placed on the Find Menu because it is probably the most common thing a user
will want to do.

See also:

o Find Dialog
o Display Find in Progress


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 102. Help for Reset Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Reset Desktop to Reset WPS to the same condition as when OS/2 was last
booted from the Harddisk.  This selection should not be needed except in
special situations.  Normally, all of the Desktop menu selections will
automatically do a Reset of the Desktop, if it is necessary.  However, there
are a number of different kinds of manual things that can be done to the INI
files and/or the Desktop Extended Attributes that will not take effect until
WPS has been restarted, therefore, this option is provided for that purpose.

When WPS is reset, the visual effect is the same as when WPS encounters an
error that prevents if from continuing.  In this case, all of the Icons and
Folders on the Desktop will disappear and the Desktop itself will appear to
fold in on itself.  After a few seconds, the Icons will start to reappear and,
if the appropriate option is selected in the OS2.INI file, the Folders that
were open at the time of the WPS termination should also reopen.  The first
time this occurs for each user, it is disconcerting.  However, this is actually
a very good feature of WPS and has saved many users the need to reboot OS/2.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 103. Help for Backup Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Backup Desktop to create a Simple Backup of the Desktop.  This selection
will first rebuild the Backup CMD file, in order to insure that it is current
with the actual Desktop Directory structure, and then will execute the CMD
file.  Normally, the user will see a window open on the Desktop and can watch
the CMD file while it makes the backup.

The actual Backup procedure consists of:

 1. Erasing the oldest Backup Generation, if it exists.

 2. Renaming each remaining Generation to the next oldest generation.

 3. Using Zip to zip the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files into a temporary zip
    file.

 4. Using Zip to zip the Desktop Directory structure and it's Extended
    Attributes into a temporary zip file.

 5. Zipping the temporary zip files from above into a single zip file.

 6. Erasing the two temporary zip files.

The reason the INI Files and the Desktop Directory structure are zipped into
separate files is so that they can be Restored individually.

This item will not operate correctly if the version of Zip that is first found
in the CONFIG.SYS PATH variable is not an OS/2 version of Zip and is a version
that supports zipping Extended Attributes.  If there is any question about
this, please refer to the discussion of the Operational Environment.

See also:

o Operational Environment
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o Create Backup CMD File
o Create Restore CMD File
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 104. Help for Do Supplemental Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Do Supplemental Backup to create a Backup of the Supplemental Backup
files.  This selection will first rebuild the Supplemental Backup CMD file, in
order to insure that it is current with the actual set of Supplemental File,
and then will execute the CMD file.  Normally, the user will see a window open
on the Desktop and can watch the CMD file while it makes the backup.

The actual Backup procedure consists of:

 1. Erasing the oldest Backup Generation, if it exists.

 2. Renaming each remaining Generation to the next oldest generation.

 3. Using Zip to zip the Supplemental Files into different ZIP files, one for
    each drive that contains at least one Supplemental Backup File. Extended
    Attributes into a temporary zip file.

 4. Zipping the temporary zip files from above into a single zip file.

 5. Erasing the temporary zip files.

The reason the Supplemental Files zipped into separate files is so that they
can be Restored correctly.  The Unzip program will Unzip files to the default
drive unless it is directed to Unzip to a specific drive.

This item will not operate correctly if the version of Zip that is first found
in the CONFIG.SYS PATH variable is not an OS/2 version of Zip and is a version
that supports zipping Extended Attributes.  If there is any question about
this, please refer to the discussion of the Operational Environment.

See also:

o Operational Environment
o Desktop Menu
o Do Supplemental Restore
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Create Supplemental Backup CMD File
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 105. Help for Create Backup CMD File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create Backup CMD File to create the CMD file that would backup the
current Desktop with the currently specified number of Backup Generations.  The
CMD file will automatically be rebuilt anytime the Desktop is actually Backed
up, but it can also be built manually, so that it can be used in other
situations, such as when the system is booted.

Any time the number of Backup Generations is changed, then this CMD file should
get rebuilt.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o Backup Desktop
o Create Restore CMD File
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o Backup CMD Filename
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Do Restore CMD when Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 106. Help for Create Restore CMD File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create Restore CMD File to Restore the Desktop from any one of the
Backup Generations created by the Backup Menu item or the Backup CMD file.

This CMD files cannot be run while WPS is active, so it must be run after a
boot from a floppy or while the boot is interrupted by ShiftRun.  There are
other menu items that will do a partial Restore of the Desktop while WPS is
active, but there did not seem to be much of a reason to do a full Restore with
WPS active, since it is unlikely that WPS would even run if the Desktop is
sufficiently corrupted that a full Restore is necessary.

The Restore CMD file takes a single input parameter, which is the Generation
the user wants to use for the Restore.  If no parameter is specified, the CMD
file will default to the first, and most recent, Generation and will PAUSE to
tell the user that the default is being used.

The steps involved in Restoring the Desktop are:

 1. The current Desktop Directory and all files in any Subdirectories are
    deleted.

 2. The current OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files are erased.

 3. The zipped Backup file is unzipped to create the two temporary zip files.

 4. One of the temporary zip files is unzipped into the Desktop Directory
    structure.

 5. The other temporary zip file is unzipped into the INI files.

 6. ATTRIB is used to verify the unzipped INI files do not have the RO
    Attribute set.

 7. The temporary zip files are erased.

It is critical that the version of UNZIP used is one that will restore the
Extended Attributes.  If there is any question about this, you should review
the Operational Environment section of this Help file.

See also:

o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o Operational Environment
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Ask Before Build Restore CMD File
o Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o Backup Desktop
o Create Backup CMD File
o Restore CMD Filename
o Include Supplemental Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 107. Help for Create Supplemental Backup CMD File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create Supplemental Backup CMD File to create the CMD file that would
backup the current set of Supplemental Backup Files with the currently
specified number of Backup Generations.  The CMD file will automatically be
rebuilt anytime the Supplemental Backup is done, but it can also be built
manually, so that it can be used in other situations, such as when the system
is booted.

Any time the number of Backup Generations is changed, then this CMD file should
get rebuilt.

See also:

o Desktop Menu
o Backup Desktop
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore
o Create Supplemental Restore CMD File
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Include Supplemental Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 108. Help for Create Supplemental Restore CMD File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create Supplemental Restore CMD File to Restore the Supplemental Backup
Files from any one of the Backup Generations created by the Supplemental Backup
Menu item or the Supplemental Backup CMD file.

The Supplemental Restore CMD file takes a single input parameter, which is the
Generation the user wants to use for the Restore.  If no parameter is
specified, the CMD file will default to the first, and most recent, Generation
and will PAUSE to tell the user that the default is being used.

See also:

o Desktop Menu
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Create Supplemental Backup CMD File
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Include Supplemental Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 109. Help for Restore Desktop ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Restore Desktop ID to Restore the proper ID to the Desktop.  For reasons
that are unknown to this developer at this time, the Desktop will sometimes
forget that it is the Desktop and revert to being a normal Folder.  If a user
opens up the Desktop menu by using the RMB on the Desktop and the resulting
menu is missing the Desktop items, such as Shutdown, then the Desktop has
forgotten it is the Desktop.  The actual problem is in the Extended Attributes
for the root Desktop Directory and this menu item will repair the error and the
Desktop menu will once again have the appropriate entries.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Defaults Dialog
o Ask Before Reset Desktop ID
o Desktop Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 110. Help for Restore Desktop Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Restore Desktop Directory to Restore the Desktop Directory structure
while WPS is active.  It is critical that nothing else be going on with the
Desktop while this activity is being done. If any attempt is made to update or
access the Desktop during this activity, it is extremely likely that WPS will
fail and will not come back up again.  In this case, it will be necessary to
boot from a floppy and do a full Desktop Restore.

The steps involved in Restoring the Desktop Directory are:

 1. The current Desktop Directory and all files in any Subdirectories are
    deleted.

 2. The zipped Backup file is unzipped to create the two temporary zip files.

 3. One of the temporary zip files is unzipped into the Desktop Directory
    structure.

 4. The temporary zip files are erased.

It is unlikely that this particular menu item will be used very often.  In
almost every case where the Desktop Directory structure is sufficiently
corrupted that it needs to be Restored, the corruption is sufficient to prevent
WPS form even running.  When the Desktop is corrupted, but WPS continues to
run, the problem is seldom corruption of the Desktop Directory structure, it is
almost always a problem with the INI files and this problem is fixed via a
different menu selection.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Defaults Dialog
o Ask Before Reset Directory
o Desktop Menu
o Backup Desktop
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 111. Help for Restore Desktop INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Restore Desktop INI Files to Restore the OS2*.INI files while WPS is
active.  It is critical that nothing else be going on with the Desktop while
this activity is being done. If any attempt is made to update or access the
Desktop during this activity, it is extremely likely that WPS will fail and
will not come back up again.  In this case, it will be necessary to boot from a
floppy and do a full Desktop Restore.

The steps involved in Restoring the INI Files are:

 1. A copy is made of both INI files and these are made the current System and
    User INI files.

 2. The current OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files are erased.

 3. The zipped Backup file is unzipped to create the two temporary zip files.

 4. One temporary zip file is unzipped into the INI files.

 5. ATTRIB is used to verify the unzipped INI files do not have the RO
    Attribute set.

 6. The temporary zip files are erased.

 7. The System and User INI files are switched back to the Restored copies of
    OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI.

 8. The copies of the original INI files are erased.

Whenever the Desktop seems to be corrupted, but WPS will stay active, it is
most likely that this menu item will fix the problem, as opposed to restoring
the Desktop Directory structure.  If the Directory structure is corrupted, it
is not very likely that WPS will even run and a full Restore of the Desktop
will probably be necessary.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Defaults Dialog
o Ask Before Restore INI Files
o Desktop Menu
o Backup Desktop
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 112. Help for Do Supplemental Restore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Do Supplemental Restore to Restore all of the Supplemental Backup Files
for the selected Generation.

See also:

o Desktop Menu
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Create Supplemental Backup CMD File
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 113. Help for Create Portable Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Create Portable Backup to create an Object by Object Backup of the
Desktop. As each step below is done, a Dialog Box will be displayed identifying
the step in progress. The collection of the Detail Information on each Object
can take some time, so you should not worry if this Dialog stays on the screen
for a few minutes.

Before this item is selected, it is a good idea to make sure that the Portable
Backup Defaults are set appropriately.

The actual Backup procedure consists of:

 1. Erasing the oldest Backup Generation, if it exists.

 2. Renaming each remaining Generation to the next oldest generation.

 3. Making a special copy of the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files.

 4. Making a special copy of the Desktop Directory structure and it's Extended
    Attributes.

 5. Finding all of the Objects on the Desktop and collecting some initial data
    on each Object.

 6. Going through the list of Objects and Collecting the Detail Object data on
    each Object.

See also:

o Operational Environment
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Desktop Menu
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Do Portable Restore
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 114. Help for Do Portable Restore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Do Portable Restore to Restore one or more Objects that were backed up
in the Portable Backup. Most of the Restore work is actually done with the
Restore Desktop Dialog.

Before this item is selected, it is a good idea to make sure that the Portable
Backup Defaults are set appropriately.

The actual Restore procedure consists of:

 1. Since several Generations of Backup are normally maintained, the user will
    be asked to select the Generation to use. The default is the latest
    Generation, 01, which is the default.

 2. Several initialization things must be done, including the creation of the
    WPS Object that will do the actual Restore of the WPS information, opening
    of a number of files, loading the Objects into the Restore Dialog Window
    and sorting the entries.

 3. The Restore Dialog will then be displayed and the user can Restore all thos
    Objects they wish to Restore.

 4. Once the Restore is completed, the Desktop will be Reset if one of the
    Restore actions require it. If the Desktop needs to be Reset, the user will
    be warned when they do the first action that will make the Reset necessary.

See also:

o Operational Environment
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Display Backup Descriptions
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Desktop Menu
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Create Portable Backup
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Use Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 115. Help for Desktop Object Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Desktop Object Settings to popup the Dialog that allows the user to
Display and/or Modify the WPS Settings for one or more Objects on the Desktop.
This option would not normally be used in situations where only a single Object
was of interest, since it takes a while for all of the Desktop Objects to be
found and initial information collected.  If only a single Object is of
interest, it is probably easier to use the Object Settings Notebook. However,
if the user wants to look at or modify the WPS Settings for a collection of
Objects, then this option is a much easier way to accomplish this task.

Since the dialog needs a considerable amount of information on the Desktop, it
will take a few seconds before the Dialog Window is displayed.  The necessary
actions are:

 1. The WPS Access Agent Object must be started.

 2. All of the Objects on the Desktop must be found.  This requires that all of
    the Folders be populated and this will take a second or so the first time
    through after a boot.

 3. Each of the Objects must be inserted in the Window and then the contents
    must be sorted, so that Objects will be easy to find.

See also:

o Operational Environment
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o What is an INI File?
o Desktop Menu
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Create Portable Backup
o Portable Restore Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 116. Help for Display Backup Descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Display Backup Descriptions to Display the Descriptions of all of the
current generations of the Desktop, Supplemental or Portable Backup Files.
These files will have a Description if the appropriate checkbox is checked in
the Defaults Dialog and the User entered a description when it was requested.
If any of the Generations does not have a Description, then the Generations
Number will be displayed along with a notification that there is no
Description.

See also:

o Desktop Menu
o Backup Desktop
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Restore Desktop Directory
o Restore Desktop INI Files
o Do Supplemental Restore
o Create Portable Backup
o Do Portable Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 117. Help for Add or Replace Key Value Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add or Replace Key Value Dialog will allow the user to modify the Value of
the current Key.  This is the only Selection that will allow the user to change
the length of a Key Value.  The bottom Window of the Main Window can be used to
modify the Value of a Key, but it cannot be used to change the length of a
Value.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Application
o Add or Replace Key Value Key
o Add or Replace Key Value Length
o Replace Ascii Key Value
o Replace Hex Key Value
o Add Zero Terminator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 118. Help for Application Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Application Name is the name of the Application that is currently being
modified.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 119. Help for Key Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Key Name is the name of the Key that is currently being modified.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 120. Help for Key Value Length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Data Length shows the current length of the Key Value that is currently
being modified.  This value will change dynamically as the actual value length
is changed.  However, the length will not change when only one character is
added to the Hexidecimal Value field, since two Hexidecimal characters are
required to make a single Ascii character.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog
o Replace Ascii Key Value
o Replace Hex Key Value
o Add Zero Terminator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 121. Help for Ascii Key Value ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ascii Key Value is the current contents of the Key Value being modified.
Any Ascii characters which would not print are replaced by a '.' to improve
readability.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog
o Add or Replace Key Value Length
o Replace Hex Key Value
o Add Zero Terminator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 122. Help for Items not yet done ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hex Key Value is a two Hexidecimal character display for each Ascii
character of the current of the Key Value being modified.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog
o Add or Replace Key Value Length
o Replace Ascii Key Value
o Add Zero Terminator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 123. Help for Add Zero Terminator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add Zero Terminator Checkbox can be used to insure that character string
Key Values always end with a null character, which is a binary zero. Since
virtually all Applications which store information in an INI file will store
character strings with the null character terminator, if this option is
checked, the Dialog termination code will insure that the Ascii value entered
has the null terminator. If the terminator is not there, then it will be added
and the length will be increased by one. This insures that both the actual data
and the stored length are as expected.

See also:

o Add or Replace Key Value Dialog
o Add or Replace Key Value Length
o Replace Hex Key Value
o Replace Ascii Key Value


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 124. Help for Dump Variables Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Dump Variables Dialog will display the current contents of all Global
Variables and various System and Application Error values.  This Dialog will be
displayed automatically whenever a terminal error occurs and gives the user the
option of recording the values in a Dump File.

See also:

o Dump File Name
o Dump Logic Error
o Dump PM Error
o Dump OS Error
o Dump Help Error
o Dump PM Test Error
o Dump PM Error Text
o Dump Logic Error Text
o Dump Variable Window
o Dump Write to File
o Dump Select New File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 125. Help for Dump File Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Name is the name of the File that will be used to contain all of the
Dump variable information displayed in the Dialog if the Write Button is
selected.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump Write to File
o Dump Select New Dump File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 126. Help for Dump Logic Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Logic Error is the IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint Internal Error Code.
Any value other than zero is an error value.  A short description of the error
will be displayed in the Logic Error Text field.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump Logic Error Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 127. Help for Dump DOS Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DOS Error is the error code returned from the last call to an OS/2 DOS API.
It will normally be a further explanation of the Logic Error, if IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint was terminated by an error.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump Logic Error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 128. Help for Dump Help Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Error is the error code returned from the last call to an OS/2 Help
API.  It will normally be a further explanation of the Logic Error, if
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint was terminated by an error or the Message Box
saying that the Help is not available was displayed.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump Logic Error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 129. Help for Dump PM Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The PM Error is the error code returned from the last call to an OS/2 PM API.
It will normally be a further explanation of the Logic Error, if IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint was terminated by an error.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump PM Test Error
o Dump PM Error Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 130. Help for Dump PM Test Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There are many situations where a call to an OS/2 PM API will return a valid
return, however, a call to the API that returns PM errors will return a nonzero
error.  IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint attempts to record this error code
whenever the Dump Dialog is invoked.  This error will normally be the last PM
non zero error code from an API that had a valid return.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump PM Test Error
o Dump PM Error Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 131. Help for Dump PM Error Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The PM Error Text is a short explanation of the PM Error or the PM Test Error
if the PM Error is zero.

Due to a problem in OS/2 1.3 CSD WR5050, this text will not be correct for this
particular level of OS/2.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump PM Error
o Dump PM Test Error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 132. Help for Dump Logic Error Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Logic Error Text is a short explanation of the IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint error shown in the Logic Error field.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump Logic Error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 133. Help for Dump Variable Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This window contains the contents of all of the IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint Variables and is only of use in Debugging problems.

See also:

o Dump Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 134. Help for Dump Write to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this Button will cause the IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint Variable
information to be written to the current Dump File.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump File Name
o Dump Select New File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 135. Help for Dump Select New File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This selection will cause the New File Dialog to be opened so that a new Dump
File can be selected.

See also:

o Dump Dialog
o Dump File Name
o Dump Write to File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 136. Help for Options Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Options Dialog will display a set of Checkboxes that allow the user to
control the behavior of IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint in a number of
different situations.

See also:

o Options Recall Files
o Options Ask Before Backup
o Options Ask Before Deleting
o Options Ask Before Updating
o Options Apps and Keys in Alpha Order
o Options Display Initial Dialog
o Options Display Size Calculation Box
o Options Display Loading Listbox Box
o Options Display Copying/Moving Box
o Options Display Find Box
o Options Display Compare Box
o Options Display Compare Write/Print Box
o Options Use Fast Copy
o Options Display Repair Box
o Ask Before Switch INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 137. Help for Options Ask Before Switch INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Switch INI Files Option controls whether the user will be warned
before they change either the User or System INI files to a new file.  Since
changing these files can have a serious affect on the Desktop and require that
the Desktop be Reset, the default behavior is to warn the user before this
function is done.  However, experienced users know the consequences and do not
want to be bothered by the warning, so this Option allows it to be turned off.

The Default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 138. Help for Options Recall Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Recall Files Option controls the maximum number of entries that will appear
on the File Recall submenu.  Once the number of files to be Recalled has
reached this value, the oldest file will be dropped from the list.  The default
is 10 and the maximum value is 100.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Recall Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 139. Help for Options Use Fast Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Use Fast Copy Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint will
use the special fast methods to access the INI files when doing a Copy or Move
of an entire INI file, Backup of an INI file or Condense of an INI file.  This
option significantly decreases the time needed to do these functions.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Copy Application(s)
o Move Application(s)
o Backup INI File(s)
o Condense INI Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 140. Help for Options Apps and Keys in Alpha Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Apps and Keys in Alpha Order Option controls how IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will load the Application and Key Names into the Listboxes.  If this
option is selected, the Names will be loaded in alphabetic order, otherwise,
they will be loaded in the order encountered.  The default for this Option is
Yes. Option.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 141. Help for Options Ask Before Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Backup Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
will ask for verification of the name of the backup file for the INI File that
is being backed up.  If no backup name has been specified, then IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint will always ask.  The default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Backup INI File(s)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 142. Help for Options Ask Before Deleting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Deleting Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will ask for verification before deleting an Application or Key.
The default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 143. Help for Options Ask Before Updating ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Updating Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will ask for verification before writing changes to an Application
or Key to the current INI File. The default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 144. Help for Options Display Initial Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Initial Dialog Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will Display the Initial Dialog Box each time it is run.  The
default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 145. Help for Options Display Size Calculation Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Size Calculation Box Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will Display a box saying that a Size Calculation  is in progress.
During the Size Calculation no user input to IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
will be accepted and the Wait Pointer will be displayed.  However, the PM
Message Queue will not be blocked so the user can switch away from IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint during this process.  The default for this Option is
Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 146. Help for Options Display Loading Listbox Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Loading Listbox Box Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will Display a box saying that it is Loading the Applications, Keys
or Current Key Value information.  During the Loading process no user input to
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint will be accepted and the Wait Pointer will be
displayed.  However, the PM Message Queue will not be blocked so the user can
switch away from IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint during this process.  The
default for this Option is No.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 147. Help for Options Display Copying/Moving Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Copying/Moving Box Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will Display a box saying that a Copy or Move  is in progress.
During the Copy or Move no user input to IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint will
be accepted and the Wait Pointer will be displayed. However, the PM Message
Queue will not be blocked so the user can switch away from IniMaint, SysMaint
or MultiMaint during this process.  The default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 148. Help for Options Display Find Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Find Box Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
will Display a box saying that a Find  is in progress.  During the Find no user
input to IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint will be accepted and the Wait Pointer
will be displayed.  However, the PM Message Queue will not be blocked so the
user can switch away from IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint during this process.
The default for this Option is No.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Find Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 149. Help for Options Display Compare Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Compare Box Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will Display a box saying that a Compare  is in progress.  During
the filling of the Compare File Listbox  no user input to IniMaint, SysMaint or
MultiMaint will be accepted and the Wait Pointer  will be displayed.  However,
the PM Message Queue will not be blocked so the user can switch away from
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint during this process.  The default for this
Option is No.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Compare Files Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 150. Help for Options Display Compare Files Write or Print Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Compare Files Write or Print Box Option controls whether IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint will Display a box saying that a Compare Files Write or
Print is in progress.  Until the operation is completed no user input to
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint will be accepted and the Wait Pointer will be
displayed.  However, the PM Message Queue will not be blocked so the user can
switch away from IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint during this process.  The
default for this Option is No.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Compare Files Dialog
o Compare Files Write Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 151. Help for Options Display Repair Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Repair Box Option controls whether IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
will Display a box saying that a Repair  is in progress.  During the execution
of the Repair File Function  no user input to IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint
will be accepted and the Wait Pointer  will be displayed.  However, the PM
Message Queue will not be blocked so the user can switch away from IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint during this process.  The default for this Option is No.

See also:

o Options Dialog
o Repair File Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 152. Help for Select Group Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Select Group Dialog will display a set of choices for an IniMaint operation
that can be performed on the Entire File, a Single Application, or a Group.
The options will include the Groups, if there are any defined and an entry for
All Groups if there is more then one Group.

It is not possible to directly invoke this Dialog, it is automatically called
whenever some action is taken that requires the user to select a Group.

See also:

o What is an IniMaint Group?
o Select Group Group Listing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 153. Help for Select Group Group Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Group Listing box will list all of the valid choices for the selected
IniMaint operation.  As soon as any one of the items in the box are selected by
clicking on them with the mouse, the IniMaint operation will start using the
selected choice.

It is not possible to directly invoke this Window, it is automatically called
whenever some action is taken that requires the user to select a Group.

See also:

o What is an IniMaint Group?
o Select Group Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 154. Help for Get Value or String Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Get Value or String Dialog is used to obtain any Numberic or Character
information that is needed from the user.

See also:

o Get Value or String Data Entry Area


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 155. Help for Get Value or String Data Entry Area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Data Entry Area is where the requested information is entered by the user.

See also:

o Get Value or String Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 156. Help for Groups Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Groups Dialog contains a Listbox with all the Applications for the Current
INI file.  Any of the Applications that are selected are included in the Group
whose name is in the Title of the Dialog.  The Groups menu item allows the user
to change the Group currently being shown and to add a new Group.  A single
Application can belong to more than one Group.  Applications are added to or
removed from a specific Group by Selecting or Deselecting the Application.

See also:

o What is an IniMaint Group?
o Groups Application Listing
o Groups Add Group
o Groups Delete Group


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 157. Help for Groups Application Listing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Groups Listbox lists all Applications in the Current INI file with every
member of the Group whose name is in the Title selected.

If the Group currently being displayed is All, then the Applications selected
are the Applications that are in any Group. Therefore, any Application that is
not selected, is not in any Group. When in this mode, any Application that is
deselected will be removed from all Groups that it is a member of.  If an
Application is selected, the user will be asked which Group they want the
Application added to, unless there is only one Group defined, in which case it
will be added to that Group.

See also:

o What is an IniMaint Group?
o Groups Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 158. Help for Groups Add Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add Group selection gives the user the ability to add a new Group to the
Current INI file.  The user will be prompted for a Group Name, the new Group
will become the current Group and the user can then add Applications to the
Group by selecting them.

See also:

o What is an IniMaint Group?
o Groups Dialog
o Groups Application Listing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 159. Help for Groups Delete Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete Group selection gives the user the ability to delete a Group from
those defined for the Current INI file.

See also:

o Groups Dialog
o Groups Application Listing


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 160. Help for Find Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Find Dialog will allow the user to do a number of different Finds.  The
current Application and Key Listboxes and Key Value MLE can be searched, or the
search can be extended to all the Key Values in an Application or the entire
current INI file.

See also:

o Find Text
o Find from Beginning
o Find from Current
o Repeat Find
o Find Type Ascii
o Find Type Hex
o Case Sensitive
o Global Find Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 161. Help for Find Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Find Text is the text that will be used to do the next Find.  The text will
be displayed in Ascii or Hex format, depending on the format the user has
selected.  When doing a Find on Application Name or Key Name, only Ascii text
is valid.

See also:

o Find Type Ascii
o Find Type Hex
o Case Sensitive


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 162. Help for Find from Beginning ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Find from Beginning button causes the Find to start from the beginning of
the Listbox, MLE, or file, depending on which Find is requested.

See also:

o Find from Current
o Repeat Find


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 163. Help for Find from Current ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Find from Current button causes the Find to start from the current position
in the Listbox, MLE, or file, depending on which Find is requested.

See also:

o Find from Beginning
o Repeat Find


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 164. Help for Repeat Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repeat Find button causes the previous Find to be repeated.  This option
will ignore any changes made in the Find Text Entryfield and will use the same
field as the previous find.

See also:

o Find from Beginning
o Find from Current


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 165. Help for Ascii Find Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ascii Find Text button causes the Find text field to be displayed in Ascii
format.  This is the only valid format for all Finds for Application and Key
names.

See also:

o Find Text
o Find Type Hex


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 166. Help for Hex Find Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Hex Find Text button causes the Find text field to be displayed in Hex
format.  This is format is not valid for Finds on Application and Key names.

See also:

o Find Text
o Find Type Ascii


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 167. Help for Case Sensitive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Case Sensitive checkbox causes the Find to be case sensitive.  If this box
is not checked, then the Find will force all fields to upper case before doing
a compare.  This option does not apply to Hex text format searches.

See also:

o Find Text
o Find Type Ascii


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 168. Help for Global Find Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Global Find Text checkbox causes the Find text to be copied to the Default
Find Text for all other Finds of the same type.  For example, if this Find is
for a Key Value, then if this item is selected and the FIND Button is selected,
the text for this Find will become the text for all Key Value Finds.  If this
checkbox is not selected, then the text for this Find will only be copied to
the other finds of the same type if the other Finds have no current search
text.

See also:

o Find Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 169. Help for Compare Files Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Compare Files Dialog will allow the user to compare two INI files on any of
three different levels of detail.

See also:

o Source INI File
o Target INI File
o Application Level Compare
o Key Name Level Compare
o Key Value Level Compare
o New Target File
o Write
o Print
o Extended Attribute Name Matching


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 170. Help for Source INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Source INI File is the INI File that will be used as the Source INI File.

See also:

o Target INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 171. Help for Target INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Target INI File is the INI File that will be used as the Target INI File.

See also:

o Source INI File
o New Target File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 172. Help for Application Level Compare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Application Level Compare selection will cause the Listbox to contain a
list of any Application Name that is in one of the Compare Files but not in the
other.

See also:

o Key Name Level Compare
o Key Value Level Compare


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 173. Help for Key Name Level Compare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Key Name Level Compare selection will cause the Listbox to contain a list
of any Application Name that is in one of the Compare Files but not in the
other.  In addition it will list any Key Name that is in an Application that is
common to the two files, but where the Key Name is missing from one of the
files.

See also:

o Application Level Compare
o Key Value Level Compare


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 174. Help for Key Value Level Compare ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Key Value Level Compare selection will cause the Listbox to contain a list
of any Application Name that is in one of the Compare Files but not in the
other.  It will also list any Key Name that is in an Application that is common
to the two files, but where the Key Name is missing from one of the files.
Finally, it will list any situation where the Application and Key Names are in
both files, but the Key Values are not equal.

See also:

o Application Level Compare
o Key Name Level Compare


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 175. Help for New Target File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting New Target File will cause the File Selection Dialog to appear and
ask for a New Target File.  If a new file is selected, it will become the
current Target File and the Listbox will be filled with the appropriate level
compare entries for this file and the current Source File.

See also:

o Source INI File
o Target INI File
o Application Level Compare
o Key Name Level Compare
o Key Value Level Compare
o Extended Attribute Name Matching


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 176. Help for Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Write will cause the Write Options Dialog to appear allowing the user
to decide what he wants to Write.  If OK is selected and the user has chosen to
Write any data, the requested data will then be written to the chosen files.

See also:

o Compare Files Write Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 177. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Print will cause the contents of the Listbox to be printed.  The
printing is done in a separate thread, so that the message queue is not
blocked.  However, the Compare Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Print is
finished, since dismissing the Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold
the Listbox items to be released.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 178. Help for Compare Files Write Options Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Compare Files Write Options Dialog will allow the user to select the
type(s) of writes and which files they want to use for the Writing.

See also:

o Select New Write INI File
o Write INI File
o Select New Write Listbox File
o Write Listbox File
o Write from Source INI File
o Write from Target INI File
o Write Missing Applications
o Write Missing Key Names
o Write Unequal Key Values
o Write Selected Items
o Write Listbox Contents


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 179. Help for Write INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Write INI File is the INI file that will be used as the output INI file for
all of the write options except the Write Listbox.  This must be a valid INI
file.  If the file does not exist, a valid INI file will be created using the
filename.  If the INI file does exist, then the selected INI write items will
be added to those already in the INI file if they do not already exist there
and replace those items that do exist.

See also:

o Select New Write INI File
o Write Missing Applications
o Write Missing Key Names
o Write Unequal Key Values
o Write Selected Items


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 180. Help for Select New Write INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Select New Write INI File checkbox to cause the New File Dialog to
be displayed asking for the name of the Write INI file.  Once the new file is
selected and validated as an INI file or created, it will be displayed as the
Write INI file.

See also:

o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 181. Help for Write Listbox File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Write Listbox File is the Ascii file that will be used as the output file
for the Write Listbox selection.  If the file does not exist, a valid Listbox
file will be created using the filename.  If the file does exist, then the
current contents of the file will be replaced by the contents of the Listbox.

See also:

o Select New Write Listbox File
o Write Listbox Contents


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 182. Help for Select New Write Listbox File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Select New Write Listbox File checkbox to cause the New File Dialog
to be displayed asking for the name of the Write Listbox file.  Once the new
file is selected and validated as a valid filename, it will be displayed as the
Write Listbox file.

See also:

o Write Listbox File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 183. Help for Write from Source INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write from Source INI File to cause the Source INI File to be used as
the source for the INI entries that will be written to the output INI file.
For example, if Write Missing Applications is one of the chosen options and
this item is selected, then the output INI file will contain all Applications
that are in the Source INI File but not in the Target File.

See also:

o Write from Target INI File
o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 184. Help for Write from Target INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write from Target INI File to cause the Target INI File to be used as
the source for the INI entries that will be written to the output INI file.
For example, if Write Missing Applications is one of the chosen options and
this item is selected, then the output INI file will contain all Applications
that are in the Target INI File but not in the Source File.

See also:

o Write from Source INI File
o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 185. Help for Write Missing Applications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write Missing Applications to cause Applications which are in one INI
file, but not in the other, to be written to the output INI File.  Which
Applications are written depends on whether the Source or Target INI file was
chosen as the Write From file.

See also:

o Write from Source INI File
o Write from Target INI File
o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 186. Help for Write Missing Key Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write Missing Key Names to cause Key Names which are in one INI file,
but not in the other, to be written to the output INI File.  Which Key Names
are written depends on whether the Source or Target INI file was chosen as the
Write From file.

In order for a Key Name to be considered a missing Key Name, the Application
must be in both the Source and the Target INI files, but the specific Key Name
missing from one or the other.

Note:  If this Write option is selected, but the Compare level is Application,
then there cannot be entries in the Listbox that would qualify for this Write.
In this case, this option would have no effect.

See also:

o Write from Source INI File
o Write from Target INI File
o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 187. Help for Write Unequal Key Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write Unequal Key Values to cause Key Values for any Application Key
Name pair that is in both files but have Key Values that are not the same, to
be written to the output INI File.  Which Key Values are written depends on
whether the Source or Target INI file was chosen as the Write From file.

Note:  If this Write option is selected, but the Compare level is Application
or Key Name, then there cannot be entries in the Listbox that would qualify for
this Write.  In this case, this option would have no effect.

See also:

o Write from Source INI File
o Write from Target INI File
o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 188. Help for Write Selected Items ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write Selected Items to cause an entry to be written to the output INI
file for each item in the Listbox that has been highlighted.  In this case, the
Write From file will only apply to those items that list Unequal Key Values, in
which case, the Key Value in the Write From file will be the one that is
written to the output INI file.

Note:  If there are no items highlighted in the Compare Listbox, then this
option will have no effect, since there are no selected entries.

See also:

o Write from Source INI File
o Write from Target INI File
o Write INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 189. Help for Write Listbox Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Write Listbox Contents to cause the contents of the Listbox to be
written to a File.  In this case, the output file is not an INI file, but a
flat Ascii File that contains one line for every entry in the Compare Files
Listbox.

See also:

o Write Listbox File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 190. Help for Repair File Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repair File Dialog will allow the user to Repair the Current INI File.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Select New Save INI File
o Save INI File
o Select New Write File
o Write File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Item Window
o Write
o Print
o Execute
o Options


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 191. Help for Save INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Save INI File is the INI File that will be used to hold any entries from
the Source INI file that are changed or deleted during the Repair process.  It
is possible to bypass saving the removed items via the Options Dialog.

See also:

o New Save File
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 192. Help for Select New Save INI File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Select New Save INI File checkbox to cause the New File Dialog to be
displayed asking for the name of the Save INI file.  Once the new file is
selected and validated as an INI file or created, it will be displayed as the
Save INI file.

See also:

o Save INI File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 193. Help for Write Window File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Write Window File is the Ascii file that will be used as the output file
for the Write selection.  If the file does not exist, a valid file will be
created using the filename.  If the file does exist, then the current contents
of the file will be replaced by the contents of the Window.

See also:

o Select New Write File
o Write


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 194. Help for Select New Write File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Select New Write File checkbox to cause the New File Dialog to be
displayed asking for the name of the Write file. Once the new file is selected
and validated as a valid filename, it will be displayed as the Write file.

See also:

o Write File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 195. Help for Report Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Only selection will cause the Window to contain a list of any Repair
that would have been made based on the Repair Checks chosen and the contents of
the INI file.  No actual changes will be made to the INI file.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Item Window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 196. Help for Ask First ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask First selection will cause the next Repair to find an situation that
needs to be Repaired.  Once the condition is identified, the user will be asked
if he wants the Repair done.  If the response is No, then no Repair will be
done and an entry will be added to the Window saying that a Repair is needed.
If the response is Yes then the Repair will be done.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Report Only
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Item Window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 197. Help for Do Repair ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Do Repair selection will cause the next Repair to find all appropriate
items that need to be Repaired. Once the condition is identified, the Repair
will be done. The user will not be asked if he wants each Repair to be done,
all requested repairs will be done automatically.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Selected
o Repair Item Window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 198. Help for Do Selected ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Do Selected selection will repair those items that have been selected by
the user.  If a selected item has dependent items, then the dependent items
will be repaired also.  For example, if a directory is selected for repair,
then all files in the directory, any subdirectories and any files in those
subdirectories will also be repaired.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Repair Item Window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 199. Help for Repair Item Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repair Item Window contains the list of Items that will be Repaired if Do
Repair or Ask First are checked.  If Do Selected is checked, then only those
items in the Window that are highlighted will be Repaired.  If Report Only is
checked, then the window is simply a list of the items that satisfied the last
type of Repair that was requested.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 200. Help for Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Write will cause the contents of the Window to be written to the
Write File.

See also:

o Write File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 201. Help for Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Options will cause Repair Options Dialog to be displayed.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 202. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Print will cause the contents of the Window to be printed.  The
printing is done in a separate thread, so that the message queue is not
blocked.  However, the Repair Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Print is
finished, since dismissing the Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold
the Window items to be released.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 203. Help for Execute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Execute will cause the actual repair action to start.  All Checks
that the user has selected will be made and the action taken will depend on the
Type that has been selected.  Every Repair action will cause a line of
information to be added to the Window.

See also:

o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Check for Valid Files and Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 204. Help for Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to do all of the WPS, PM and File Handle Repair actions and is a
short hand way to do all of these Repairs with a single selection.  This
selection currently includes Delete Unused Printers, Repair Directory and File
Handles, Repair WPS Entries and Repair Both WPS and File Handle Entries.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o Delete Unused Printer Entries
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair Both WPS and Handle Entries
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All WPS and Handle Entries
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 205. Help for Do All Individual INI File Repairs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Do All Individual INI File Repairs selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to do all of the Repair actions that are specific to the currently
selected INI file and is a short hand way to do all of these Repairs with a
single selection. The Repairs that are currently included in this group are the
Check Path and File Names and Look for Zero Length Key Values.  These Repairs
are always done on the current INI file, as opposed to those that are always
done on the INI Files currently being used by OS/2.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o Check for Valid Files and Paths
o Look For Zero Length Key Values
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All WPS and Handle Entries
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 206. Help for Check Path and FileNames ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Check Path and FileNames selection will cause the next Repair Execution to
find every Key Name or Key Value in the Current INI File that is a path or
filename, compare it to the actual paths and filenames on the various hardrives
and remove or report any entries that are not found on the harddisk.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

See also:

o Do All Individual INI File Repairs
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 207. Help for Look For Zero Length Key Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Look For Zero Length Key Values selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to look for any entries in the Current INI File that have a zero
length key value.  This is a condition which should never occur, but has been
seen from time to time in some INI files.  Normally, when an entry is written
to an INI file with a zero length key, the entry is deleted by the INI file
code.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

See also:

o Do All Individual INI File Repairs
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 208. Help for Remove Old PM_ProgramList Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Remove Old PM_ProgramList Entries selection will cause the
PM_ProgramListxxx Entries from the OS2.INI file to be displayed. These entries
are a leftover from V1.3 and V2.0 and are no longer needed.  However, if these
entries remain in the file, any Objects referenced by these entries cannot be
deleted.  If it is deleted, it will reappear as soon as the Folder that
contained the Object is reopened.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 209. Help for Delete Unused Printer Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete Unused Printer Entries selection will cause the Printer entries from
the OS2SYS.INI file that are no longer OBjects on the Desktop to be displayed.
These entries are not really an operational problem, however, they are not
removed from the file when the Printer Object is deleted and there are a number
of PM Applications that look in the OS2SYS.INI file to obtain the Printer
information and these Applications will treat these entries as real Printers.
However, any attempt to Print to the entries will not work.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

See also:

o Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 210. Help for Display Valid Dir/File Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Valid Dir/File Handles selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the OS2SYS.INI
file, compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual contents
of the appropriate drive and place all valid entries into the Repair Window.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drives is determined
by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Invalid Dir/File Handles
o Display All Dir/File Handles
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 211. Help for Display Invalid Dir/File Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Invalid Dir/File Handles selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the OS2SYS.INI
file, compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual contents
of the appropriate drive and place all invalid entries into the Repair Window.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drives is determined
by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Valid Dir/File Handles
o Display All Dir/File Handles
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 212. Help for Display All Dir/File Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display All Dir/File Handles selection will cause the next Repair Execution
to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the OS2SYS.INI file,
compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual contents of the
appropriate drive and place all entries into the Repair Window with an
identification as to which are valid and which are invalid.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drives is determined
by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Valid Dir/File Handles
o Display Invalid Dir/File Handles
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 213. Help for Repair Dir/File Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repair Dir/File Handles selection will cause the next Repair Execution to
analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the OS2SYS.INI file, compare
each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual contents of the
appropriate drive, place all invalid entries into the Repair Window and do the
Repair action specified by the Type of Repair button.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drives is determined
by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

See also:

o Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Valid Dir/File Handles
o Display Invalid Dir/File Handles
o Display All Dir/File Handles
o Save INI File
o Ask Before Change Handles
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 214. Help for Display Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Objects selection will cause the next Repair Execution to analyze
the PM_Abstract Objects entry in the OS2.INI file, and place all entries into
the Repair Window.  There is no automatic way to validate the Objects, so it is
assumed that they are all valid.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Destroy Objects
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 215. Help for Destroy Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Destroy Objects selection will cause the next Repair Execution to analyze
the PM_Abstract Objects entry in the OS2.INI file, and place all entries into
the Repair Window.  There is no automatic way to validate the Objects, so it is
assumed that they are all valid, therefore, the Do Repair button will not
delete anything from the Repair Window.  The items can be deleted by Selecting
individual items.  Extreme care must be taken before deleting any Objects as it
can cause problems with the Desktop.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Objects
o Save INI File
o Ask Before Destroy Objects
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 216. Help for Restore Missing Location Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Restore Missing Location Entries selection will examine each of the entries
in the PM_Abstract:Objects entry in the OS2.INI file looking for Location
information.  If the Location information is found, then the
PM_WorkPlace:Location entry will be checked to see if the location is listed.
If the Location is listed then the Object Name and the Location will be added
to the Repair window.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are fixed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 217. Help for Display Valid WPS Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Valid WPS Entries selection will cause the next Repair Execution to
analyze the various WPS entries in the OS2.INI file, validate the value range
for each one, compare each to the Handles or Objects structure and place all
valid entries into the Repair Window.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Invalid WPS Entries
o Display All WPS Entries
o Repair WPS Entries
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 218. Help for Display Invalid WPS Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Invalid WPS Entries selection will cause the next Repair Execution
to analyze the various WPS entries in the OS2.INI file, validate the value
range for each one, compare each to the Handles or Objects structure and place
all invalid entries into the Repair Window with an notation as to why they are
not valid.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Valid WPS Entries
o Display All WPS Entries
o Repair WPS Entries
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 219. Help for Display All WPS Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display All WPS Entries selection will cause the next Repair Execution to
analyze the various WPS entries in the OS2.INI file, validate the value range
for each one, compare each to the Handles or Objects structure and place all
entries into the Repair Window with an notation as to whether each item is
valid or invalid. For the invalid items there will also be a notation as to why
they are not valid.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Valid WPS Entries
o Display Invalid WPS Entries
o Repair WPS Entries
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 220. Help for Repair WPS Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repair WPS Entries selection will cause the next Repair Execution to
analyze the various WPS entries in the OS2.INI file, validate the value range
for each one, compare each to the Handles or Objects structure, place all
invalid entries into the Repair Window with an notation as to why they are not
valid and do the Repair action specified by the Type of Repair button.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display Valid WPS Entries
o Display Invalid WPS Entries
o Display All WPS Entries
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 221. Help for Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries selection will cause the next
Repair Execution to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the
OS2SYS.INI file, compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual
contents of the appropriate drive and analyze the various WPS entries in the
OS2.INI file, validate the value range for each one, compare each to the
Handles or Objects structure and place all valid entries into the Repair
Window.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All WPS and Handle Entries
o Repair Both WPS and Handle Entries
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 222. Help for Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries selection will cause the next
Repair Execution to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the
OS2SYS.INI file, compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual
contents of the appropriate drive and analyze the various WPS entries in the
OS2.INI file, validate the value range for each one, compare each to the
Handles or Objects structure and place all invalid entries into the Repair
Window with an notation as to why they are not valid.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All WPS and Handle Entries
o Repair Both WPS and Handle Entries
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 223. Help for Display All WPS and Handle Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display All WPS and Handle Entries selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the OS2SYS.INI
file, compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual contents
of the appropriate drive and analyze the various WPS entries in the OS2.INI
file, validate the value range for each one, compare each to the Handles or
Objects structure and place all entries into the Repair Window with an notation
as to whether each item is valid or invalid.  For the invalid items there will
also be a notation as to why they are not valid.

The only type of Repair that is valid when listing items is the Report Only
button.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries
o Repair Both WPS and Handle Entries
o Report Only
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 224. Help for Repair Both WPS and Handle Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repair Both WPS and Handle Entries selection will cause the next Repair
Execution to analyze the active PM_Workplace Handles entry in the OS2SYS.INI
file, compare each Drive, Directory and Filename entry to the actual contents
of the appropriate drive and analyze the various WPS entries in the OS2.INI
file, validate the value range for each one, compare each to the Handles or
Objects structure, place all invalid entries into the Repair Window with an
notation as to why they are not valid and do the Repair action specified by the
Type of Repair button.

These Repair functions are always done on the INI files in use by OS/2 at the
time and are independent of the current INI file.  In other words, this Repair
action will always be the same, no matter what INI file is currently being
worked on.

Whether the entries are removed or reported, depends on which Repair Type of
button the user has chosen.

The handling of CD-ROM, Virtual Disk, Floppy and Not Ready Drive handles is
determined by the selections in the Repair Options Dialog.

The WPS Repair selections can take a considerable amount of time to actually
fill the Repair Window.  The reason for this is because both the Handles and
Objects structures must be filled before the analysis of the WPS entries in the
INI files can start.

See also:

o Do All WPS, PM and File Handle Repairs
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Display All Valid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All Invalid WPS and Handle Entries
o Display All WPS and Handle Entries
o Save INI File
o Report Only
o Ask First
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 225. Help for Repair Options Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Repair Options Dialog will allow the user to control various options during
the repair process.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?
o What does Repair Do?
o Repair File Dialog
o Bypass Known Errors
o Do Not Save Deleted Items
o Log to INIREP.LOG
o Ask Before Change Handles
o Ask Before Destroy Objects
o Ignore Network Type Handles
o Report Network Type Handles
o Auto Repair Network Type Handles
o Ignore CD-ROM Handles
o Report CD-ROM Handles
o Auto Repair CD-ROM Handles
o Ignore Virtual Disk Handles
o Report Virtual Disk Handles
o Auto Repair Virtual Disk Handles
o Ignore Floppy Drive Handles
o Report Floppy Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Floppy Drive Handles
o Ignore Not Ready Drive Handles
o Report Not Ready Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Not Ready Drive Handles
o Ignore Unknown Drive Handles
o Report Unknown Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Unknown Drive Handles
o Ignore Invalid Drive Handles
o Report Invalid Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Invalid Drive Handles


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 226. Help for Bypass Known Errors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Bypass Known Errors.LOG checkbox will cause the Repair function to bypass
entries that are known to IniMaint and will quickly reappear even if they are
deleted.

The default for this item is Yes.

Among the kinds of things bypassed are:

o Temporary files with the extension of ### that are created when INI files are
  updated.
o The zero entry in the Abstracts Icons Application generated by Deskman/2.
o All entries in PM_Workplace:Locations for Objects with an Object handle that
  indicates the Object is a WPTransient or derived Class Object.  These Object
  Handles are in the 0x10000 to 0x1FFFF range.

See also:

o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 227. Help for Do Not Save Deleted Items ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Do Not Save Deleted Items checkbox will cause the items that are removed
from an INI file to simply be deleted and not saved.  If this option is chosen,
then Repairs can be performed without specifying a Save INI File.

See also:

o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog
o Save INI File
o New Save File


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 228. Help for Ask Before Change Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Change Handles checkbox controls whether the user is warned
before the File Handle Structure in the OS2SYS.INI file is updated.  Since
modifying this structure can have a serious effect on the Desktop, the user is
normally warned about this before they are allowed to make any changes.
However, experienced users already understand the issues and do not want to be
bothered with the warning time after time, so this option allows them to turn
it off.

The Default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 229. Help for Ask Before Destroy Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Destroy Objects checkbox controls whether the user is warned
before they are given a chance to manually destroy and of the Objects on the
Desktop.  Since destroying Objects can have a serious effect on the Desktop and
will result in the Desktop being Reset, the user is normally warned about this
before they are allowed to make any changes.  However, experienced users
already understand the issues and do not want to be bothered with the warning
time after time, so this option allows them to turn off the warning.

The Default for this Option is Yes.

See also:

o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 230. Help for Log to INIREP.LOG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Log to INIREP.LOG checkbox will cause diagnostic information to be written
to the INIREP.LOG file.  This should only be used as part of a problem
determination sequence, since the saved information will make little sense
without a knowledge of the program internals.

See also:

o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 231. Help for Ignore CD-ROM Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore CD-ROM Handles button will cause all directories and files on CD-ROM
drives to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This option would be used if
the User normally has a specific CD-ROM mounted and does not want to know if
the Handles in the OS2SYS.INI file agree with the directories and files on the
drive.

See also:

o Report CD-ROM Handles
o Auto Repair CD-ROM Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 232. Help for Report CD-ROM Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report CD-ROM Handles button will cause all directories and files on CD-ROM
drives to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if the Do Repair button
is selected in the Repair Dialog, the invalid directories and files will not be
removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be used if the User wants
to know about invalid Directories and Files on the CD-ROM drive, but does not
want them removed unless they are specifically selected.

See also:

o Ignore CD-ROM Handles
o Auto Repair CD-ROM Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 233. Help for Auto Repair CD-ROM Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair CD-ROM Handles button will cause all directories and files on
CD-ROM drives to be removed if the Do Repair button is selected in the Repair
Dialog.  This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore CD-ROM Handles
o Report CD-ROM Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 234. Help for Ignore Virtual Disk Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Virtual Disk Drive Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Virtual Disk drives to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This
option would be used if the User normally has a specific Virtual Disk Drive and
does not want to know if the Handles in the OS2SYS.INI file agree with the
directories and files on the drive.

See also:

o Report Virtual Disk Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Virtual Disk Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 235. Help for Report Virtual Disk Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Virtual Disk Drive Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Virtual Disk drives to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if
the Do Repair button is selected in the Repair Dialog, the invalid directories
and files will not be removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be
used if the User wants to know about invalid Directories and Files on the
Virtual Disk Drive, but does not want them removed unless they are specifically
selected.

See also:

o Ignore Virtual Disk Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Virtual Disk Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 236. Help for Auto Repair Virtual Disk Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair Virtual Disk Drive Handles button will cause all directories
and files on Virtual Disk drives to be removed if the Do Repair button is
selected in the Repair Dialog. This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore Virtual Disk Drive Handles
o Report Virtual Disk Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 237. Help for Ignore Floppy Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Floppy Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Floppy drives to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This option would be
used if the User normally has a specific Floppy mounted and does not want to
know if the Handles in the OS2SYS.INI file agree with the directories and files
on the drive.

See also:

o Report Floppy Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Floppy Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 238. Help for Report Floppy Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Floppy Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Floppy drives to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if the Do Repair
button is selected in the Repair Dialog, the invalid directories and files will
not be removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be used if the User
wants to know about invalid Directories and Files on the Floppy Drive, but does
not want them removed unless they are specifically selected.

See also:

o Ignore Floppy Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Floppy Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 239. Help for Auto Repair Floppy Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair Floppy Drive Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Floppy drives to be removed if the Do Repair button is selected in the
Repair Dialog.  This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore Floppy Drive Handles
o Report Floppy Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 240. Help for Ignore Not Ready Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Not Ready Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files
on Not Ready drives to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This option
would be used if the User has drives that normally have specific volumes
mounted, but are not currently ready, and does not want to see the Handles in
the OS2SYS.INI file for the drive.

See also:

o Report Not Ready Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Not Ready Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 241. Help for Report Not Ready Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Not Ready Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files
on Not Ready drives to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if the Do
Repair button is selected in the Repair Dialog, the invalid directories and
files will not be removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be used
if the User wants to know about invalid Directories and Files on the Not Ready
drive, but does not want them removed unless they are specifically selected.

See also:

o Ignore Not Ready Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Not Ready Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 242. Help for Auto Repair Not Ready Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair Not Ready Drive Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Not Ready drives to be removed if the Do Repair button is selected in
the Repair Dialog. This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore Not Ready Drive Handles
o Report Not Ready Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 243. Help for Ignore Network Type Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Network Type Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Network Types to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This option would be
used if the User normally has a specific Network Entry and does not want to
know if the Handles in the OS2SYS.INI file agree with the directories and
files.

See also:

o Report Network Type Handles
o Auto Repair Network Type Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 244. Help for Report Network Type Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Network Type Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Network Entry to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if the Do Repair
button is selected in the Repair Dialog, the invalid directories and files will
not be removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be used if the User
wants to know about invalid Directories and Files, but does not want them
removed unless they are specifically selected.

See also:

o Ignore Network Type Handles
o Auto Repair Network Type Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 245. Help for Auto Repair Network Type Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair Network Type Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Network Entry to be removed if the Do Repair button is selected in the
Repair Dialog.  This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore Network Type Handles
o Report Network Type Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 246. Help for Ignore Unknown Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Unknown Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Unknown drives to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This option would be
used if the User has drives that are identified by the Repair File Handle code
as Unknown Drives and does not want to see the Handles in the OS2SYS.INI file
for the drive.  This situation can occur with some of the newer VDISK Device
Drivers,

See also:

o Report Unknown Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Unknown Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 247. Help for Report Unknown Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Unknown Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Unknown drives to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if the Do Repair
button is selected in the Repair Dialog, the directories and files will not be
removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be used if the User wants
to know about invalid Directories and Files on the Unknown drive, but does not
want them removed unless they are specifically selected.

See also:

o Ignore Unknown Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Unknown Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 248. Help for Auto Repair Unknown Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair Unknown Drive Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Unknown drives to be removed if the Do Repair button is selected in
the Repair Dialog. This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore Unknown Drive Handles
o Report Unknown Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 249. Help for Ignore Invalid Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Invalid Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Invalid drives to be ignored, even if they are not valid.  This option would be
used if the User has drives that are identified as Invalid drives by the Repair
File Handle code and does not want to see the Handles in the OS2SYS.INI file
for the drive.  This is most commonly the case for Network Drives if the user
is not currently logged onto the Network,

See also:

o Report Invalid Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Invalid Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 250. Help for Report Invalid Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Report Invalid Drive Handles button will cause all directories and files on
Invalid drives to be reported in the Repair Window.  However, if the Do Repair
button is selected in the Repair Dialog, the directories and files will not be
removed from the OS2SYS.INI file.  This option would be used if the User wants
to know about invalid Directories and Files on the Invalid drive, but does not
want them removed unless they are specifically selected.

See also:

o Ignore Invalid Drive Handles
o Auto Repair Invalid Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 251. Help for Auto Repair Invalid Drive Handles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Auto Repair Invalid Drive Handles button will cause all directories and
files on Invalid drives to be removed if the Do Repair button is selected in
the Repair Dialog. This is the Default selection.

See also:

o Ignore Invalid Drive Handles
o Report Invalid Drive Handles
o Do Repair
o Do Selected
o Repair Dir/File Handles
o Repair WPS Entries
o Repair File Dialog
o Repair Options Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 252. Help for EA Defaults Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The EA Defaults Dialog will allow the user to control various options while
working with the Extended Attributes.

The items that can be set are:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA File Directory
o Display In Progress Box
o Ignore No EAs for View/Test
o Continue on Sharing Violations
o Include Hidden Files
o Include System Files
o Ask for EA Filename
o Keep Temporary Files
o Overwrite Existing Files
o Log to INIEA.LOG


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 253. Help for EA File Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The EA File Directory is the Directory that will be used whenever the name for
a file to hold Extended Attributes is automatically generated.  This will also
be used as the starting directory for the File Dialog when the user is asked to
select a filename.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o Ask for EA Filename
o Keep Temporary Files
o Overwrite Existing Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 254. Help for Display In Progress Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display In Progress Box checkbox will cause the Processing EAs Dialog to
appear while the EAs are being processed.  If this option is not chosen, then
only the Wait pointer will apppear on the screen.

The Default for this item is YES.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 255. Help for Ignore No EAs for View/Test ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore No EAs for View/Test checkbox will prevent an entry in the Edit of
Test Windows for any Directory or Path that does not have any EAs. If this item
is set to NO and there is a Directory or File with no EAs, there will be an
entry in the Appropriate Window for this Directory or File and, for the Edit,
the Key Name will simply say there are no EAs. If the user is not interested in
knowing which files do not have EAs, then this option should be left as YES,
since it will reduce the number of entries in the Windows for those situations
where a number of Directories or Files are included.

The Default for this item is YES.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 256. Help for Include Hidden Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include Hidden Files checkbox will cause files with the Hidden Attribute
set to be included in the files that are candidates to have their EAs
processed.

The Default for this item is NO.

See also:

o Include System Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 257. Help for Include System Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include System Files checkbox will cause files with the System Attribute
set to be included in the files that are candidates to have their EAs
processed.

The Default for this item is NO.

See also:

o Include Hidden Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 258. Help for Ask for EA Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask for EA Filename checkbox will cause the user to be prompted for a
Filename anytime that one is needed to contain the EAs for the selected
Directories and/or Files.  If this items is left as the Default NO, then the
filenames will be constructed automatically and will be a combination of the
range of Directories and/or Files requested and the root entry picked by the
user.

The only exception to the above is when the Keep Temporary Files  option is not
checked and the View or Compare menu items are selected.  Since all files
needed to accomplish the View or Compare will be automatically deleted as soon
as the function is completed, the user will not be asked for a filename unless
the filename constructed already exists and the Overwrite Existing Files option
is not selected.

The Default for this item is NO.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o EA File Directory
o Keep Temporary Files
o Overwrite Existing Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 259. Help for Keep Temporary Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Keep Temporary Files checkbox will cause files that are created to
temporarily hold EA information, such as for a Compare of the EAs between two
sets of Directories and/or Files, to be kept after the files are no longer
needed.  If this item is left as the Default NO, then these files will be
deleted.  This will apply whether or not the name of the files is chosen by the
user or done automatically.

Selecting this option will also disable the Ask for EA Filename  for those
selections that use temporary files, such as View and Compare, since the files
used for these selections will be automatically deleted once the user is
finished with them.

The Default for this item is NO.

See also:

o EA File Directory
o Ask for EA Filename
o Overwrite Existing Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 260. Help for Overwrite Existing Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Overwrite Existing Files checkbox will cause any existing file that already
exists to be overwritten when the same filename is chosen by the user or built
automatically.  If this item is left as the Default NO, then the user will
always be prompted before a file is overwritten.

The Default for this item is NO.

See also:

o EA File Directory
o Ask for EA Filename
o Keep Temporary Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 261. Help for Log to INIEA.LOG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Log to INIEA.LOG checkbox will cause diagnostic information to be written
to the INIEA.LOG file.  This should only be used as part of a problem
determination sequence, since the saved information will make little sense
without a knowledge of the program internals.

The Default for this item is NO.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 262. Help for Continue on Sharing Violations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Continue on Sharing Violations checkbox will prevent the user from being
asked if he wants to continue whenever a Sharing Violation is encountered while
attempting to access the Extended Attributes for a Directory or File.  If this
item is checked, then SysMaint will assume that the user wants to continue to
the next Directory or File.

The Default for this item is NO.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 263. Help for EA Test Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The EA Test Dialog displays the results of the Extended Attribute Test that the
user has requested.

See also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an Extended Attribute?
o How to Modify Extended Attributes
o Test EAs
o Write
o Print


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 264. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Print will cause the contents of the Listbox to be printed.  The
printing is done in a separate thread, so that the message queue is not
blocked.  However, the Test Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Print is
finished, since dismissing the Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold
the Listbox items to be released.

See also:

o Test EAs
o EA Test Dialog
o Write


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 265. Help for Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Write will cause the contents of the Listbox to be written to the
file that is selected from the File Selection Dialog. The writing is done in a
separate thread, so that the message queue is not blocked.  However, the Test
Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Write is finished, since dismissing the
Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold the Listbox items to be
released.

See also:

o Test EAs
o EA Test Dialog
o Print


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 266. Help for Explain Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Explain Dialog displays the results of the Explain requested by the user
via one of the Popup Menus.

See also:

o Popup Menus
o Explain
o Write
o Print


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 267. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Print will cause the contents of the Listbox to be printed.  The
printing is done in a separate thread, so that the message queue is not
blocked.  However, the Explain Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Print is
finished, since dismissing the Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold
the Listbox items to be released.

See also:

o Popup Menus
o Explain
o Explain Dialog
o Write


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 268. Help for Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Write will cause the contents of the Listbox to be written to the
file that is selected from the File Selection Dialog. The writing is done in a
separate thread, so that the message queue is not blocked.  However, the
Explain Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Write is finished, since
dismissing the Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold the Listbox items
to be released.

See also:

o Popup Menus
o Explain
o Explain Dialog
o Print


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 269. Help for Desktop Defaults Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Desktop Defaults Dialog will allow the user to control various options that
apply to the Desktop items and the Snapshot Backup of the Desktop.

The items that can be set are:

o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o User Backup CMD Filename
o User Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Reset System Attribute
o Ask Before Reset Directory
o Ask Before Restore INI Files
o Ask Before Build Restore CMD File
o Ask Before Reset Desktop ID
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Change All Paths
o Use Backup Descriptions
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy

See Also:

o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Display Backup Descriptions
o The Problem with Shadows
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 270. Help for Save Desktop Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Save Desktop Directory is the Directory that will be used as the target
directory for all Simple Backups of the Desktop. This Directory will also be
used as the default directory for the Backup and Restore CMD files.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 271. Help for Backup CMD Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Backup CMD Filename is the Filename that will be used for the Backup CMD
file.  This Filename must have an extension of CMD.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Backup Desktop
o Create Backup CMD File
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o User Backup CMD Filename
o User Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 272. Help for Restore CMD Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Restore CMD Filename is the Filename that will be used for the Restore CMD
file.  This Filename must have an extension of CMD.

See Also:

o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Create Restore CMD File
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o User Backup CMD Filename
o User Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 273. Help for Supplemental Backup CMD Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Supplemental Backup CMD Filename is the Filename that will be used for the
Supplemental Backup CMD file.  This Filename must have an extension of CMD.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o User Backup CMD Filename
o User Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 274. Help for Supplemental Restore CMD Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Supplemental Restore CMD Filename is the Filename that will be used for the
Supplemental Restore CMD file.  This Filename must have an extension of CMD.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o User Backup CMD Filename
o User Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 275. Help for User Backup CMD Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The User Backup CMD Filename is the Filename that will be used for the User
Backup CMD file.  This Filename must have an extension of CMD.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o User Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 276. Help for User Restore CMD Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The User Restore CMD Filename is the Filename that will be used for the User
Restore CMD file.  This Filename must have an extension of CMD.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o User Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Restore CMD when Backup
o Include Supplemental Backup
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o Change All Paths


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 277. Help for Maximum Backup Generations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Maximum Backup Generations is the number of generations of Simple Backups
that will be automatically maintained. Once the number of Backups reaches the
maximum, each new Backup will cause the oldest generation to be deleted.  The
default value is 10 generations.

If the number of generations is increased, there will be no problems with the
actual backup files.  However, if the number of generations is reduced below
the number of actual generations of Backup that currently exist, then the extra
generations must be deleted manually.  For example, if the maximum generations
were to be reduced from 10 to 5 and there were 10 generations of backup
currently in the Backup Directory, Backup generations 6 thru 10 would not be
deleted automatically.  The reason for this is because  it is very possible
that the user does not want the higher generations deleted and this approach
gives them complete control over deleting old generations when the maximum is
changed.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 278. Help for Reset System Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Reset System Attribute checkbox controls whether the System Attribute is
turned back on for the OS2.INI and OS2SYS.INI files after a Snapshot Backup of
the Desktop is made.  This setting only applies to versions of OS/2 after the
OS/2 V2.1 Service Pack, since this is the first version that turned the System
Attribute on for these files.  It does not appear to cause a problem to leave
the Attribute off, but should probably be reset after the Backup of the
Desktop.  The only reason that a user would not leave this option at it's
default setting would be if the Backup CMD File that is generated was to be
used on an earlier version of OS/2.

The Default for this Option is On.

See Also:

o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Backup Desktop
o Desktop Defaults Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 279. Help for Ask Before Reset Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Reset Directory checkbox controls whether the user is warned
before the Desktop Directory Structure is replaced.  Since modifying this
structure can have a serious effect on the Desktop, the user is normally warned
about this before they are allowed to make any changes.  However, experienced
users already understand the issues and do not want to be bothered with the
warning time after time, so this option allows them to turn it off.

The Default for this Option is On.

See Also:

o Restore Desktop Directory
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 280. Help for Ask Before Restore INI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Restore INI Files checkbox controls whether the user is warned
before the Desktop INI Files are replaced.  Since modifying these files can
have a serious effect on the Desktop and will result in the Desktop being
reset, the user is normally warned about this before they are allowed to make
any changes.  However, experienced users already understand the issues and do
not want to be bothered with the warning time after time, so this option allows
them to turn it off.

The Default for this Option is On.

See Also:

o Restore Desktop INI Files
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 281. Help for Ask Before Build Restore CMD File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Build Restore CMD File checkbox controls whether the user is
notified before the Desktop Restore CMD File is rebuilt.  Since it is critical
that the user know that they must rebuild this CMD file whenever certain kinds
of changes are made ot the Desktop, the user is normally informed of this
whenever they recreate this file.  However, experienced users already
understand the issues and do not want to be bothered with the warning time
after time, so this option allows them to turn it off.

The Default for this Option is On.

See Also:

o Create Restore CMD File
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Restore CMD Filename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 282. Help for Ask Before Reset Desktop ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ask Before Reset Desktop ID checkbox controls whether the user is warned
before the Desktop ID is reset.  Since modifying the Desktop ID can have a
serious effect on the Desktop, the user is normally warned about this before
they are allowed to make any changes.  However, experienced users already
understand the issues and do not want to be bothered with the warning time
after time, so this option allows them to turn it off.

The Default for this Option is On.

See Also:

o Restore Desktop ID
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 283. Help for Do Restore CMD when Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Do Restore CMD when Backup checkbox controls whether or not the Restore CMD
file is automatically recreated whenever the Backup CMD file is created or the
Desktop is Backed up.

If this Option is turned on then the user can be sure that the Backup and
Restore CMD files are always in synch with each other.

The Default for this Option is Off.

See Also:

o Backup Desktop
o Create Backup CMD File
o Create Restore CMD File
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 284. Help for Include Supplemental Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include Supplemental Backup checkbox controls whether the Supplemental
Backup and Restore are automatically done when the Desktop Backup or Restore
are done.

The Default for this Option is Off.

See Also:

o Backup Desktop
o Create Backup CMD File
o Create Restore CMD File
o Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename
o Select Supplemental Backup Files


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 285. Help for Change All Paths ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the Change All Paths checkbox is checked, then any change to the Path for
the Backup or any of the CMD Files will be reflected in all of the other
entries.  This is an easy way to modify the Path for the Backup and all of the
Backup CMD Files, since changing one of them will automatically change all of
them while leaving the filename the same.

The Default for this Option is Off.

See Also:

o Backup Desktop
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Backup CMD Filename
o Restore CMD Filename
o Supplemental Backup CMD Filename
o Supplemental Restore CMD Filename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 286. Help for Use Backup Descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the Use Backup Descriptions checkbox is checked, then the user can add a
Description to each set of backup files.

When any of the Backups are requested and completed, the user will be presented
with a Dialog that will ask for a Description.  If no Description is entered,
then a default one will be generated that includes the date and time of the
Backup.

When any of the Restores are requested, the user will see a dialog with the
Descriptions of each of the Backup Generations in place of the Dialog that
simply requests the Generation Number to use.  If the User selects OK then the
Description that is highlighted will be used for the Restore.

There is also an item on the Desktop Menu that allows the user to display the
Descriptions for the current Generations for the Desktop, Supplemental or
Portable Backups.

The Default for this Option is Off.

See Also:

o Backup Desktop
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Restore Desktop Directory
o Restore Desktop INI Files
o Do Supplemental Restore
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Display Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 287. Help for Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the Make OS2*.INI Backup Copy checkbox is checked, then the Desktop Restore
CMD File will include lines that will make a copy of the current User and
System INI files before they are ERASED as part of the normal Desktop Restore
operation.

The primary purpose of this option is to preserve the current INI files so that
any information that the user might want to copy from the Current files to the
Restored  Files is preserved past the actual Restore operation.

The Current User and System INI files will be written to files that are in the
same Directory and have the same name except that the extension will be changed
to PRV, which stands for PReVious.  The PRV extension was chosen so that the
name will not conflict with a similar file in the same Direstory with an
extension of BAK and in hope that it will be a unique filename.

The Default for this Option is Off.

See Also:

o Restore CMD Filename
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 288. Help for Select Supplemental Backup Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Select Supplemental Backup Files Dialog manages the file that are included
in the Supplemental Backup.

The files that will be included in the default list of files the first time
this Dialog is displayed are all of the following files that can be found.

 1. CONFIG.SYS

 2. AUTOEXEC.BAT

 3. STARTUP.CMD

 4. WIN.INI

 5. SYSTEM.INI

 6. CONTROL.INI

 7. PROGMAN.INI

The items that can be set are:

o Add Supplemental Backup File
o Add DOS AUTOEXEC Files
o Add Multiple Files
o Delete Supplemental Backup File

See Also:

o Desktop Menu
o Desktop Defaults Dialog
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 289. Help for Add Supplemental Backup File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add Supplemental Backup File will display the New File Dialog and, if a
file is selected, the file will be added to the list of files to be included in
the Supplemental Backup.

See Also:

o Add DOS AUTOEXEC Files
o Add Multiple Files
o Delete Supplemental Backup File
o Desktop Menu
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 290. Help for Add DOS AUTOEXEC Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add DOS AUTOEXEC Files will search the Abstract Objects information in the
INI files, find all of the Files that are identified as DOS_AUTOEXEC Files for
DOS Program Objects and add these files to the list of Supplemental Backup
Files if they are not already there.

See Also:

o Add Supplemental Backup File
o Add Multiple Files
o Delete Supplemental Backup File
o Desktop Menu
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 291. Help for Add Multiple Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Add Multiple Files allows the user to add more than one File from more than
on Directory using mutiple Directory entries and Filename wildcards.

When this selection is made, the user will see a Message Box that explains the
selection process followed by a dialog that asks for the Path or Paths to be
searched.  Multiple Paths can be entered as long as they as separated by
semicolons the same way that entries are made in the CONFIG.SYS file.  If no
Path is entered, then the DPATH variable in the CONFIG.SYS will be used for the
list of Paths to search.  Finally, the user will be asked for a starting
Filename and this Filename can contain the normal wildcard characters ? and *
with the normal rules.

Once all of the information is entered, then the Filename is cmbined with each
of the Paths and all Files which meet the criteria are added to the
Supplemental Backup File list.

Before a file is added to the Supplemental File List, a check is made to insure
that the file is not already in the list.  Therefore, there is no need to worry
about duplicate Files, the routine that adds the Files will insure that no
duplicates exist.

See Also:

o Add Supplemental Backup File
o Add DOS AUTOEXEC Files
o Delete Supplemental Backup File
o Desktop Menu
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 292. Help for Delete Supplemental Backup File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Delete Supplemental Backup File will delete the currently highlighted
filename from the list of files to be included in the Supplemental Backup.

See Also:

o Add Supplemental Backup File
o Desktop Menu
o Select Supplemental Backup Files
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o Do Supplemental Backup
o Do Supplemental Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 293. Help for Portable Backup Defaults Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Portable Backup Defaults Dialog will allow the user to control various
options that apply to the Portable Backup of the Desktop.

The items that can be set are:

o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Ignore Floppy Drives
o Display Default Settings
o Use Backup Descriptions

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Desktop Menu
o Display Backup Descriptions
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o The Problem with Shadows
o Types of Desktop Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 294. Help for Save Desktop Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Save Desktop Directory is the Directory that will be used as the target
directory for all Portable Backups of the Desktop. For each Portable Backup
Generation there will be four files placed in this Directory.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 295. Help for Backup File Root ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Backup File Root is the Root that will be used for the names of the files
that hold the Portable Backup information.  The Generation Number will be
appended to the Root and an Extension added to the file name to identify the
contents of each of the files.  There will be four files for each Backup
Generation.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 296. Help for WPS Logging File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WPS Logging File is the name of the file that will be used to record a
detailed Log of the Portable Backup or Restore. The Logging should not normally
be turned on, since it will degrade the performance of both the Backup and the
Restore and is of little use except to diagnose problems.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 297. Help for Maximum Backup Generations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Maximum Backup Generations is the number of generations of Portable Backups
that will be automatically maintained. Once the number of Backups reaches the
maximum, each new Backup will cause the oldest generation to be deleted.  The
default value is 10 generations.

If the number of generations is increased, there will be no problems with the
actual backup files.  However, if the number of generations is reduced below
the number of actual generations of Backup that currently exist, then the extra
generations must be deleted manually.  For example, if the maximum generations
were to be reduced from 10 to 5 and there were 10 generations of backup
currently in the Backup Directory, Backup generations 6 thru 10 would not be
deleted automatically.  The reason for this is because  it is very possible
that the user does not want the higher generations deleted and this approach
gives them complete control over deleting old generations when the maximum is
changed.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 298. Help for OS2.INI System Entries ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select OS2.INI System Entries to include the OS/2, PM and WPS entries in the
window that displays the contents of the OS2.INI file.  The System type entries
are not normally included in the window because the intent of displaying these
entries in the first place is to allow for an easy movement of the information
to the new Desktop.  Since the new Desktop will already have the System level
information set based on the install and any System level entries that need to
be set because of any of the Restores will be set by PM or WPS, there is little
reason to clutter the window with this information.  However, there will
certainly be situations where there will be a need to copy over at least one of
the System level entries.  Therefore, if this item is selected, the all of the
Applications from the original OS2.INI file will be displayed in the window.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 299. Help for Do Safe Backup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Do Safe Backup if you want MultiMaint to ignore all Object information
that cannot be gathered via standard published WPS methods and PM API's during
the Portable Save operations.

WPS does not currently provide a way to Save or Restore all of the instance
information for the various WPS Objects.  IBM has said that this capability
will be available sometime in a future release of OS/2, but that release is
still quite a distance away. MultiMaint has the capability to both Save and
Restore the instance information that is outside the scope of the published
Methods and API's.  Both the Save and the Restore are done using publically
available Methods and API's, however, some of them are used in a way that was
not originally envisioned by the IBM developers.  Both the Save and the Restore
have been done many many times with the addtional collection and restoration
capability turned on.  However, it is recognized that there are those users who
would prefer to be absolutely safe and would rather spend the time manually
resetting all of the instance information that cannot be saved via the standard
Methods and API's.  Therefore, this mechanism has been provided to all the user
to turn off the additional instance information collection and restoration.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 300. Help for Do Safe Restore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Do Safe Restore if you want MultiMaint to ignore all Object information
that cannot be gathered via standard published WPS methods and PM API's during
the Portable Restore operations.  If the Safe Save Option was set during the
save for the Generation being used for the Restore, then this option has no
effect, since non of the additional information was collected during the
Portable Save.

WPS does not currently provide a way to Save or Restore all of the instance
information for the various WPS Objects.  IBM has said that this capability
will be available sometime in a future release of OS/2, but that release is
still quite a distance away. MultiMaint has the capability to both Save and
Restore the instance information that is outside the scope of the published
Methods and API's.  Both the Save and the Restore are done using publically
available Methods and API's, however, some of them are used in a way that was
not originally envisioned by the IBM developers.  Both the Save and the Restore
have been done many many times with the addtional collection and restoration
capability turned on.  However, it is recognized that there are those users who
would prefer to be absolutely safe and would rather spend the time manually
resetting all of the instance information that cannot be saved via the standard
Methods and API's.  Therefore, this mechanism has been provided to all the user
to turn off the additional instance information collection and restoration.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 301. Help for Log to WPS Log File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Log to WPS Log File to turn on the logging function for either the
Portable Save or Restore operations.  Turning on this option will degrade the
performance of both the Save and Restore and is intended primarily for
identifying problems with either the Save or Restore.  Normally, this option
would be left off unless a log file was requested as part of the technical
support functions.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 302. Help for Automatic Desktop Reset ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Automatic Desktop Reset to have MultiMaint automatically issue the
Desktop Reset when it is called for because of the nature of the Restore that
was done and the version of OS/2 that is being run.  If this Option is turned
Off then the Desktop Reset will not be done, however, if a Reset of the Desktop
is indicated by the type of Restore, when the Restore is complete the user will
be notified that a Reset is indicated and given the option to have MultiMaint
do the Reset.

The default for the item is On.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 303. Help for Automatic Desktop Shutdown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Automatic Desktop Shutdown to have MultiMaint automatically issue the
Desktop Shutdown when it is called for because of the nature of the Restore
that was done and the version of OS/2 that is being run.  If this Option is
turned Off then the Desktop Shutdown will not be done, however, if an immediate
Shutdown of the Desktop is indicated by the type of Restore, when the Restore
is complete the user will be notified that a Shutdown is indicated and given
the option to have MultiMaint do the Shutdown.

If the Shutdown is not done and the system is rebooted, it is possible that
some of the Instance Information will not be saved.  One example of this is the
position of Objects that are on the actual Desktop, the Objects can end up in
the default position in the upper left hand corner of the Desktop.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 304. Help for Desktop Shutdown Ask ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Desktop Shutdown Ask to cause MultiMaint to ask the user if they want
MultiMaint to Shutdown the Desktop because at least one Object has been
Restored.  This Option will only be checked if the Automatic Desktop Reset
Option does not apply to the Restore just completed.  In other words, if some
Objects were Restored, but an immediate Shutdown of the Desktop is not
indicated and the Desktop is not Reset for one reason or another, the user is
simply informed that the safest action ot take at this point is to do a
Shutdown so that all of the Instance Information for all of the Restored
Objects is written to the appropriate locations.

If the Shutdown is not done and the system is rebooted, it is possible that
some of the Instance Information will not be saved.  One example of this is the
position of Objects that are on the actual Desktop, the Objects can end up in
the default position in the upper left hand corner of the Desktop.

The default for the item is On.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Select Lower Level
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 305. Help for Select Lower Level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Select Lower Level to change the how the selection of Objects is handled
in the Portable Restore and Settings windows.  If this Option is off, then only
the Objects specifically selected will be highlighted. For example, if a Folder
is selected, but the Objects in the Folder are not selected, then only the
Folder will be highlighted.  If this Option is on, then the selection of any
Object will automatically cause all Objects contained in the selected Object to
also be selected. For example, if a Folder is selected, then all of the Objects
inside the Folder will also be selected, even if there are multiple levels of
Objects contained in the Folder, all of them will be selected.

If the User is in the process of updating or displaying specific Objects, then
this Option should be left in it's default Off condition.  If the User is in
the process of Restoring or Displaying a set of Objects to a new Desktop,
setting this Option to On will make it much easier to accomplish this task,
since only the highest level Object need be selected.

If this option is On and the Desktop entry is selected, then every Object on
the Desktop will be highlighted and any further operations will be done on
every Object on the Desktop.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Log to WPS Log File
o Automatic Desktop Reset
o Automatic Desktop Shutdown
o Desktop Shutdown Ask
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 306. Help for Ignore Floppy Drives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Ignore Floppy Drives to have the code that saves the Folder type
information for the Drives Object to ignore the information for the Drive A:
and Drive B: Objects. If this option is turned off, then an attempt will be
made to collect the information for Drives A: and B:. If there is no media in
either or both of the drives when this is done, the operation will wait until
the drives timeout. At this point, the drives will be ignored.

Turning Off this option, which activates the collection of the Drive A: and B:
Objects, will never cause a problem, even when there is no media in the drives.
However, it can significantly extend the amount of time that it takes to do
either the Backup or the Restore. the Drives Object

The default for the item is On.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Portable Restore Dialog
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 307. Help for Display Default Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Display Default Settings to cause the WPS Settings Dialog to display all
of the Object Settings for the requested type, even if they are still in the
default condition.

For example, there are a very large number of possible DOS settings and quite a
number of Style settings. If this option is in it's default condition, Off, the
only DOS or Style settings that will be displayed will be the ones which are no
longer defaults. If the option is turned on, then all of the DOS settings and
all of the Style settings will be displayed in the appropriate settings window.

The default for the item is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Save Desktop Directory
o Backup File Root
o WPS Logging File
o Maximum Backup Generations
o OS2.INI System Entries
o Do Safe Backup
o Do Safe Restore
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 308. Help for Use Backup Descriptions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If the Use Backup Descriptions checkbox is checked, then the user can add a
Description to each set of backup files.

When any of the Backups are requested and completed, the user will be presented
with a Dialog that will ask for a Description.  If no Description is entered,
then a default one will be generated that includes the date and time of the
Backup.

When any of the Restores are requested, the user will see a dialog with the
Descriptions of each of the Backup Generations in place of the Dialog that
simply requests the Generation Number to use.  If the User selects OK then the
Description that is highlighted will be used for the Restore.

There is also an item on the Desktop Menu that allows the user to display the
Descriptions for the current Generations for the Desktop, Supplemental or
Portable Backups.

The Default for this Option is Off.

See Also:

o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Create Portable Backup
o Do Portable Restore
o Display Backup Descriptions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 309. Help for Portable Restore Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Portable Restore Dialog is used to control the Portable Restore of the
various WPS Desktop Objects.

See Also:

o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 310. Help for Write File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Write File is the file that will be used to hold the contents of the
Portable Restore Window if the Write button is selected.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 311. Help for Existing Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Existing Object buttons determine the action to take when an Object being
Restored already exists in the same Folder.

The selections and their effect are:

 1. Bypass  - The Object will not be Restored.

 2. Ask   - The user will be asked what they want done.

 3. Replace - The existing Object will be deleted and recreated.

 4. Update  - The Instance information for the existing Object will be updated.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 312. Help for Class Not Registered ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Class Not Registered selections control what will be done when a Restore is
attempted for an Object and the Class for the Object is not a standard Class
and is not currently registered for the Desktop that is the target of the
Restore.

If the Class is Registered, either automatically or because the user asks that
it be Registered, the DLL that implements the Class must already exist on the
Target machine and must be in a Directory that is in the LIBPATH.  If either of
these conditions are not met, then the Registration of the Class will fail and
the Object will not be Restored.

The selections and their effect are:

 1. Bypass     - The Object will not be Restored.

 2. Ask      - The user will be asked what they want done.

 3. Auto Register - The Class will automatically be Registered using the
    information from the Saved Desktop.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 313. Help for Replaces Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Replaces Class determines the action to be taken if the Class of an Object
being Restored Replaces one of the existing Classes and the Replacement has not
yet been done.  If a Class Replacement is done, then the Desktop will be Reset
once the Portable Restore Dialog is dismissed, even if Do Safe Restore is
selected in the Portable Defaults Dialog.

The selections and their effect are:

 1. Bypass    - The Object will not be Restored.

 2. Ask      - The user will be asked what they want done.

 3. Auto Replace - The New Class will automatically Replace the old Class.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 314. Help for Folder not Found ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Folder not Found determines what action to take if an Object is being Restored
and the Folder that should contain the Object does not currently exist on the
Desktop.

The selections and their effect are:

 1. Bypass    - The Object will not be Restored.

 2. Ask     - The user will be asked what they want done.

 3. Create    - The Folder will automatically be Created, this is the same as
    Restoring the Folder as well as the current Object.

 4. To Desktop  - The Folder will not be Created and the Selected Object will
    be Restored Directly to the Desktop.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 315. Help for Restore Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Restore Type selection determines how to choose which Objects to Restore
when the Execute is selected.

If the Portable Restore Window contains a list of Objects then the selections
and their effect are:

 1. Do Selected - The Objects which are currently highlighted will be Restored.

 2. Do All    - All Objects currently displayed in the Portable Restore window
    will be Restored.

If the Portable Restore Window contains the contents of the OS2.INI file then
the selections and their effect are:

 1. Do Selected - The Entries which are currently highlighted will be copied to
    the existing OS2.INI file.

 2. Do All    - All Entries currently displayed in the Portable Restore window
    will be copied to the existing OS2.INI file.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 316. Help for Execute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Execute button will cause the Restore to be done based on the contents of
the Portable Restore Window and the currently set options.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 317. Help for Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Write button will cause the contents of the Portable Restore Window to be
written to the current Write File.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 318. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Printbutton will cause the contents of the Portable Restore Window to be
printer on the default printer.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 319. Help for Change Window Contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Change Window Contents button swaps the contents of the Portable Restore
Window between the list of Objects to Restore and the list of OS2.INI
Applications to copy to the current OS2.INI file.  The actual text on this
button will depend on the current contents of the Portable Restore Window.

If the Portable Restore Window current contains a list of Objects to Restore,
then the text on this button will be OS2.INI.

If the Portable Restore Window current contains a list of the Appplication in
the OS2.INI File to Restore, then the text on this button will be Objects.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o System
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 320. Help for System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The System button will cause the System Settings from the Source Desktop to be
set on the Target Desktop.  These settings are things like the Cursor type and
size, Keyboard Repeat Rate, Window Border Size and other general Desktop
settings.  These settings do not include the Desktop Colors or the Desktop
Color Palette.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o Portable Restore Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 321. Help for Portable Restore Item Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Portable Restore Item Window is the window that contains the items that can
be restored.  The listing will either be the Objects that can be Restored to
the Target Desktop or the OS2.INI Applications from the Source Desktop that can
be Restored to the OS2.INI file on the Target Desktop.

Initially, the window will simply list the appropriate items.  As items are
Restored, the text for the items in the window will be updated to reflect the
result of the attempt to Restore that specific item.  The result will normally
be, Restore Successful, which means that no problems were encountered.  if the
Restore was not successful because of the settings of one of the Options, then
the additional text will say Restore Unsuccessful and give the reason for the
failure.  If an unexpected problem was encountered during the Restore attempt
for the item, then the Restore Unsuccessful text will appear along with some
reason information.

If an attempt to Restore an item fails because of an unexpected problem, then
the user should do the following and contact technical support.

 1. Write the Contents of the Restore Window to the Write File.

 2. Assuming the Logging was not turned on in the Defaults Dialog, the user
    should exit from the Restore Dialog, go to the Defaults Dialog, turn on the
    Logging, restart the Restore Dialog and redo the Restore that failed.

 3. Both the copy of the Portable Restore Window that was written and the Log
    File should be zipped and sent to Carry Associates via a diskette or via
    our Compuserve ID, 72662,3616, along with any additional information
    available.

See Also:

o Portable Restore Dialog
o Write File
o Existing Object
o Class Not Registered
o Replaces Class
o Folder not Found
o Restore Type
o Execute
o Write
o Print
o Change Window Contents
o System
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What is an INI File?
o Types of Desktop Backup
o The Problem with Shadows


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 322. Help for Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The question could easily be asked why there is any need for a feature like the
Display and Modify Object Settings, since everything that this feature can do
can be duplicated by using the Object Settings Notebook.  The answer is simple.
Using the Object Settings Notebook works well if the user is interested in
looking at the current settings for a specific Object or needs to modify the
settings for a specific Object.  However, using the Settings Notebook is not an
easy tool if the user wants to be able to examine or modify the settings for a
large number of Objects.  This feature is designed to address this problem.
Using the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog makes it very easy to
display or modify the settings for multiple Objects in only a few steps.

For example, it is possible to set the Always Maintain Sort Flag for every
Folder on the Desktop by simply:

 1. Opening the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog.

 2. Making sure the Select Lower Levels is set in the Defaults.

 3. Clicking on the Desktop entry in the window and waiting for all of the
    Objects to be selected.

 4. Select the Set Folder Sort from the Set Menu.

 5. Set the Folder Sort in the first Folder Sort Dialog that appears.

 6. Setting the Do Remaining checkbox in the Folder Sort Dialog.

 7. Click on the OK button.

This will set the Sort Flag for every single Folder, including Folders that are
contained in other Folders and including special Folder Objects that are
derived from the WPFolder Class.  For example, if Icon Heaven is installed, it
subclasses the WPFolder Class and creates a new Class.  The MultiMaint code
will always work up the Class structure to find the standard Class from which
new Classes are derived and, if they are derived from the WPFolder Class, they
will be included in the set of Objects whose Sort Flag will be changed.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Object Settings Menu
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 323. Help for Display and Modify Object Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog is used to Display and/or Modify
the Settings for any of the Objects on the Desktop.

When this item is selected from the Desktop menu, the following events occur:

 1. The AccessWPS Agent Object is created, if it does not already exist.

 2. The Desktop is found and then, using the Desktop Folder as a root, all of
    the other Objects on the Desktop are found.  During this process, a basic
    amount of information is collected on each Object.

 3. Everytime a Shadow Object is found, that additional information needed to
    crossreference the Shadow information is also collected.

 4. The Object entries are inserted into the Settings Window and sorted.  If
    the original defaults are in effect, then all of the Objects will appear in
    the window.  However, if there are defaults that have been saved from a
    previous use of this feature, then it is possible that the window will
    contain only a subset of all of the Objects on the Desktop.

There are a number of ways to control which Objects are included in the Display
and/or modification and, since it is not obvious, I have included a short
description here.

Selecting Items in the Window:

 1. You can do the normal selection of the Objects you want to Display or
    change by simply selecting them.

 2. The Portable Default Dialog has a Checkbox, Select Lower Levels, that
    controls how the selection works. If you check this item in the Default
    Dialog then selecting an item, such as a Folder, will also select all of
    the Object contained in the Folder. You can select evey Object by turning
    this Option on and clicking on the Desktop entry.

 3. You can select the items in the window by name.

Using the Filter Menu:

 1. There are two ways to control the list of Objects via the Filer Menu. One
    is by type of Object, File or Abstract, and the other is by individual
    Object Class.

 2. The Object Type menu item will include or exclude Objects based on the type
    of Object. The Default is to include all Objects and the menu items allow
    the user to specify that only File Based Objects, such as Folders, only
    Abstract Objects, such as Program Objects, or No Objects be included.

 3. The Object Type can then be further refined by Including or Excluding
    specific Classes. The Include and Exclude override the Object Type. In the
    default situation where all Types are Included, the Include Menu will be
    empty, since everything is already Included. All of the Objects will be on
    the Exclude menu. If any of the Objects on the Exclude menu are selected,
    then that Class will be Excluded from an Display or Modification actions
    and the Class will not appear on the Excluded Menu. If only the File Type
    Objects are selected, then all of the File Type Objects, such as Folders,
    will appear on the Exclude Menu and all Abstract Object will appear on the
    Include menu.

 4. The Reset Exclude/Include menu item will display all classes that have been
    specifically Included or Excluded and the user can reset this flag for the
    individual Classes or can reset it for all of the Classes.

For example, if a user wanted to Display something for only Folders they would:

 1. Make sure that Select Lower Level is turned on in the Defaults.

 2. Set the Object Type on the Filter menu to None.

 3. Use the Include menu item on the Filter menu to Include the WPFolder Class.

 4. Highlight the entire Desktop by clicking on the first itme in the Window.

 5. Display and/or Modify whatever settings they are interested in.

See Also:

o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Object Settings Menu
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 324. Help for Object Settings Item Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Object Settings Item Window is the window that contains the Objects that
can Displayed or Modified.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 325. Help for Display Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Class will cause the Class information for all of the Classes of
the Objects currently on the Desktop to be displayed.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 326. Help for Select by Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Select by Name allows the user to select the items in the Settings Dialog
Window by Name.

The Name Selection code uses a substring approach.  In other words, all Objects
will be selected if they contain the entered name anywhere in the name of the
Object. Doing a selection on 'Prod' would select every Object that had the word
'Prod' anywhere in the name. There is an entry on the Filter Menu that controls
whether or not the selection will pat attention to case.

The '*' character can be used as a wildcard character in the selection. For
example, the seletion 'Prod*File' will select all Objects that have the
characters 'Prod' in them followed by the characters 'File'.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 327. Help for Set Objects Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Objects Dialog is the Dialog that will appear whenever the user selects
an item from the Set Object Menu and there is at least one Object that
qualifies.  Although the actual Object Settings that can be modified will
naturally change from menu item to menu item, this dialog is a standard one and
works the same way in each case.

The dialog consists of a number of elements:

 1. The top line will always be the name of the Object whose settings are
    potentially going to be changed.

 2. Each of the Object Settings that can be changed with this dialog will be
    listed along the left side of the window.

 3. The current value for each of the settings will be displayed to the right
    of the name of the setting.  Even though some of the current values look
    like they can be modified, all of these are Read Only areas.

 4. An area that can be used to modify the setting will be displayed to the
    right of or immediately under the current setting, depending on the format
    of the item.

 5. At the bottom of the dialog there are two checkboxes along with the OK and
    Cancel buttons.

Even though the formats vary, in all cases, the current settings for the Object
will not be modified if the changed area for that setting is empty, with the
exception of YES or NO settings where the Unset button indicates that nothing
will be changed.

It is possible to see entries in the changed areas as soon as the dialog
appears for a particular Object because this is not the first Object in the
series to be changed and change information was entered for previous Objects.

If the OK button is selected, then the indicated changes will be made to this
current Object, the dialog will disappear and the next Object will be displayed
and so on until all of the Objects have been displayed or the process
terminated by using one of the checkboxes as described below.  The Cancel
button has the same effect except that the current Object will not be modified,
but the following Objects will still be displayed until all of them have been
acted on or the process terminated.

Before either the OK or Cancel buttons are selected, the process of displaying
qualified Objects can be terminated with either of the two checkboxes.

If you simply want to stop making changes, then set the Ignore Remaining
checkbox.  If you select this checkbox, the action on the current Object will
depend on which button you select, but you will not be asked about any
remaining Objects that qualify and none of them will be modified.

If you want the modifications you have made applied to all of the remaining
qualified Objects without your being asked about them, then check the Do All
Remaining checkbox.  This will cause any of the settings you have specifically
set in the Dialog to be applied to all of the remaining Objects that qualify.

See also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Settings Display Window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 328. Help for Object Settings Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Object Settings Menu contains the items that control the entire Object
Display and Modify area.

The Menu Items are:

o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 329. Help for Set Object Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Object Menu contains the items that control the dialogs that Modify the
various Object Settings.

The Menu Items are:

o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 330. Help for Set Object Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Object Styles will pop up the Set Object Style Dialog for each of the
selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class Exclude/Include Filters.
In other words, in order to be modified, an Object must be selected in the
Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 331. Help for Set View Attributes and Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set View Attributes and Fonts will pop up the Set View Attributes and Fonts
Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class
Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object
must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass
the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 332. Help for Set Program Executable Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Program Executable Information will pop up the Set Program Executable
Information Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type
and Class Exclude/Include Filters. In other words, in order to be modified, an
Object must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class
must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 333. Help for Set Position and Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Position and Size will pop up the Set Position and Size Dialog for each
of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class Exclude/Include
Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object must be selected
in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass the Class
Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 334. Help for Set Miscellaneous and ObjectID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Miscellaneous and ObjectID will pop up the Set Miscellaneous and
ObjectID Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and
Class Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an
Object must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class
must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 335. Help for Set Folder Sort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set Folder Sort will pop up the Set Folder Sort Dialog for each of the
selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class Exclude/Include Filters.
In other words, in order to be modified, an Object must be selected in the
Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 336. Help for Set WINOS2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set WINOS2 Settings will pop up the Set WINOS2 Settings Dialog for each of
the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class Exclude/Include
Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object must be selected
in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass the Class
Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 337. Help for Set DOS File Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS File Settings will pop up the Set DOS File Settings Dialog for each
of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class Exclude/Include
Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object must be selected
in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass the Class
Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 338. Help for Set DOS COM and HW Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS COM and HW Settings will pop up the Set DOS COM and HW Settings
Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class
Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object
must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass
the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 339. Help for Set DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings will pop up the Set DOS Mouse, Prt and
Key Settings Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type
and Class Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an
Object must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class
must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 340. Help for Set DOS Video Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS Video Settings will pop up the Set DOS Video Settings Dialog for
each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class Exclude/Include
Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object must be selected
in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass the Class
Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 341. Help for Set DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings will pop up the Set DOS DPMI and EMS
Memory Settings Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class
Type and Class Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be
modified, an Object must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the
Object's Class must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 342. Help for Set DOS Other Memory Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS Other Memory Settings will pop up the Set DOS Other Memory Settings
Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and Class
Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an Object
must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class must pass
the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Miscellaneous Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 343. Help for Set DOS Miscellaneous Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Set DOS Miscellaneous Settings will pop up the Set DOS Miscellaneous
Settings Dialog for each of the selected Objects that pass the Class Type and
Class Exclude/Include Filters.  In other words, in order to be modified, an
Object must be selected in the Object Settings Window and the Object's Class
must pass the Class Filter.

A Set Objects Dialog will be displayed for each qualified Object starting with
the first Object and continuing until the final Object, unless the user stops
the process in one way or another.  The general information on the common
aspects of the Set Objects Dialog can be found in the Help item for the Dialog.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Set Objects Dialog
o Object Styles
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous and ObjectID
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS File Settings
o DOS COM and HW Settings
o DOS Mouse, Prt and Key Settings
o DOS Video Settings
o DOS DPMI and EMS Memory Settings
o DOS Other Memory Settings
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 344. Help for Display Object Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Object Menu contains the items that control the items that can be
Displayed for the various Objects.

The Menu Items are:

o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 345. Help for Display Object Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Object Styles will display the Style information for the selected
Objects.

If the Display Defaults box is checked in the Defaults Dialog, then all of the
Styles for the Object will be displayed.  If this option is not checked, then
the only Styles that will be displayed are those that are not the Defaults for
the Object.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 346. Help for Display Class, Name and Location ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The DisplayClass, Name and Location will display the Class, Title and Name of
the Folder that contains the selected Objects.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 347. Help for Display View Attributes and Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The View Attributes and Fonts will display the Attributes and Fonts for the
various views for selected Folder Objects.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 348. Help for Display Program Executable Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Program Executable Information will display the program type of
information for the selected Objects.  This consists of things like the EXE
Name, Startup Directory and Parameters.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 349. Help for Display Position and Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Position and Size will display the Icon position in the appropriate
Folder both as a raw value and as a percentage of the maximum size of the
Folder that contains the Object.  If the Folder that contains the Object has
the Always Maintain Sort Order box checked, then it is possible there will be
no position information for the Icon and, even if there is position
information, it will be that last position before the Always Maintain Sort
Order was checked.

For those Objects where it is appropriate and the information is other than the
Desktop default, the Open Position and Size of the Object will also be
displayed.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 350. Help for Display Miscellaneous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Miscellaneous will display the Object information that does not
easily fit into other catagories.  This includes things like the Real Name and
the ObjectID of the Object.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 351. Help for Display Folder Sort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Folder Sort will display the Always Maintain Sort Order flag for
all Folders.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 352. Help for Display Shadow Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Shadow Information will display the Shadow information for the
selected Objects that are Shadows and all Objects that have a Shadow.  This
will include the Object that is being Shadowed and the Shadow Object Name.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o WINOS2 Settings
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 353. Help for Display WINOS2 Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display WINOS2 Settings will display the DOS and WINOS2 information for the
selected Objects that are Windows Program Objects.

If the Display Defaults box is checked in the Defaults Dialog, then all of the
items for the Object will be displayed.  If this option is not checked, then
the only items that will be displayed are those that are not the Defaults for
the Object.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o DOS Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 354. Help for Display DOS Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display DOS Settings will display the DOS information for the selected
Objects that are DOS or Windows programs.

If the Display Defaults box is checked in the Defaults Dialog, then all of the
items for the Object will be displayed.  If this option is not checked, then
the only items that will be displayed are those that are not the Defaults for
the Object.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Styles
o Class, Name and Location
o View Attributes and Fonts
o Program Executable Information
o Position and Size
o Miscellaneous
o Folder Sort
o Shadow Information
o WINOS2 Settings
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 355. Help for Filter Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter Menu contains the items that control the Filtering of the Objects
and the Control of the contents of the Display Settings Window.

The Menu Items are:

o Object Type
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Ignore Case for Name Selection
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 356. Help for Display Filtered Classes Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Filtered Classes Only will control how Objects are selected to be
displayed in the Settings Window. Normally, all Objects on the Desktop will be
displayed, even if the Object has been Excluded from the Displays because of
the Class Type Filter or the specific Class Exclusion.  It is easy to become
confused as to what Objects will be candidates and which will not. If this item
is checked, then the only Objects in the Settings window will be the Objects
that have passed both the Object Type and the Include/Exclude Class Filters.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Type
o Ignore Case for Name Selection
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 357. Help for Ignore Case for Name Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ignore Case for Name Selection will cause the search for Objects that
satisfy the Select by Name criteria to ignore the case of the selection
criteria and the Object Name and this is the default condition.  If the user
wants the Name Search to be case sensitive, then this menu item can be used.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Type
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 358. Help for Remember Filter Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Remember Filter Information will cause the various Filter settings to be
remembered from one execution of the Object Settings Dialog to another.
Normally, the Display and Filter Settings will always start with the Defaults.
However, if this item is checked, then the current selections will be
remembered and will be the Default setting the next time the Object Settings
Dialog is invoked.  The only thing that is not remembered from one execution to
the next is the specific Class Includes and Excludes.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Type
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Ignore Case for Name Selection
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 359. Help for Exclude Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Exclude Class item allows the user to specifically Exclude and of the
Classes of Objects that are currently Included as candidates for Display or
Modification.  This item will override the Class Type item on the Filter Menu.
In other words, if a Class is specifically Excluded, then the Objects of that
Class will never be candidates for the Display or Modify menu items.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Type
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Ignore Case for Name Selection
o Remember Filter Information
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 360. Help for Include Class ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Include Class item allows the user to specifically Include and of the
Classes of Objects that are currently Excluded as candidates for Display or
Modification.  This item will override the Class Type item on the Filter Menu.
In other words, if a Class is specifically Included, then the Objects of that
Class will always be candidates for the Display or Modify menu items.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Type
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Ignore Case for Name Selection
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 361. Help for Reset Include/Exclude ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Reset Include/Exclude item allows the user to reset the Exclude or Include
Flag for any one Class or to Reset the Flag for all of the Classes that have it
set.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Object Type
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Ignore Case for Name Selection
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 362. Help for Filter Object Type Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter Object Type Menu displays and selects which types of Objects are to
be included in the Settings Window based on their Class Type, File Based or
Abstract.

This entry works in cooperation with the Filter Menu items to specifically
Include or Exclude specific Classes.  If a specific Class is Included or
Excluded using the appropriate entries on the Filter Menu, then the Include or
Exclude will override this selection.  In other words, a Class that is
specifically Included will always be a candidate for Display or Modification
and a Class that is specifically Excluded will never be a candidate, no matter
which Object Types are selected.

The Menu Items are:

o Both
o File Objects Only
o Abstract Objects Only
o None

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 363. Help for Filter Object Type Both ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter Object Type Both will include all types of Objects in as candidates
for the various Display or Modify Menu Actions.  If there are no Classes that
are specifically Excluded, then all Objects will be candidates.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o File Objects Only
o Abstract Objects Only
o None
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 364. Help for Filter Object Type File Objects Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter Object Type File Objects Only will include only those Objects that
are File Based Objects as candidates for the various Display or Modify Menu
Actions.  These kinds of Objects include things like the Desktop itself and all
Folders.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Both
o Abstract Objects Only
o None
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 365. Help for Filter Object Type Abstract Objects Only ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter Object Type Abstract Objects Only will include only those Objects
that are Abstract Objects as candidates for the various Display or Modify Menu
Actions.  Abstract Objects are those Objects that are not File Based.  These
Objects include all Program Objects, the Shredder and many other types.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Both
o File Objects Only
o None
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 366. Help for Filter Object Type None ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Filter Object Type None will include no types of Objects in as candidates
for the various Display or Modify Menu Actions.  If there are no Classes that
are specifically Included, then no Objects will be candidates.  This can be
used to restrict the Display or Modification to a single Class of Objects by
using this selection along with Including the Class of interest.

See Also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Both
o File Objects Only
o Abstract Objects Only
o Display Filtered Classes Only
o Remember Filter Information
o Exclude Class
o Include Class
o Reset Include/Exclude
o Settings Display Window
o Display and Modify Object Settings
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o Object Settings Menu
o Object Settings Item Window
o Portable Backup Defaults Dialog
o Set Object Menu
o Display Object Menu
o Filter Menu
o Display Class
o Select by Name
o Desktop Menu
o What makes up the Desktop?
o What is an INI File?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 367. Help for Display Object Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Display Object Settings Dialog displays the Object Settings for the
selected Objects.

See also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Settings Display Window
o Write
o Print


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 368. Help for Settings Display Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Settings Display Window contains the list of Items that are appropriate for
the selected Objects and the Display menu item that was selected.

See also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started
o Why is the Display and Modify Object Settings Dialog Needed?
o What makes up the Desktop?
o Types of Desktop Backup


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 369. Help for Write ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Write will cause the contents of the Window to be written to the
Write File that the user selects from the New File Dialog.

See also:

o Display and Modify Object Settings Getting Started


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 370. Help for Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Print will cause the contents of the Window to be printed.  The
printing is done in a separate thread, so that the message queue is not
blocked.  However, the Repair Dialog cannot be dismissed until the Print is
finished, since dismissing the Dialog will cause the memory allocated to hold
the Window items to be released.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 371. Help for Help index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help index on the Help pull down to see the help index for IniMaint,
SysMaint or MultiMaint


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 372. Help for Keys help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Keys help on the Help pull down for help on the keys you use to perform
a specific task,

When you select this item, you see a list of key groups.  Double click on one
of the groups to see the keys you use to perform the task.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 373. Help for Help pull down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help pull down contains items you can use to get different types of on-line
help for the IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint.

Press the Enter key to access the items on the Help pull down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 374. Help for help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Help for help on the Help pull down for information on how to use the
Reliability Plus Control help facility.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 375. Help for Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Cancel pushbutton to exit the dialog without performing any action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 376. Help for Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Help pushbutton when you need help with the highlighted field on the
dialog.

For more information about using the help facility, select Help for help on the
Help pull down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 377. Help for Extended help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Extended help on the Help pull down to see the extended help panel for
IniMaint, SysMaint or MultiMaint.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 378. Help for Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Double click on one of the following groups to get help for keys that do a
specific task:

o Cursor movement keys
o Action bar keys
o Menu keys
o Dialog keys
o System keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 379. Help for Cursor movement keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to move the cursor in the editing area.

Key:          Function:

Up            Moves the cursor up one line.

Down          Moves the cursor down one line.

Right         Moves the cursor right one character.

Left          Moves the cursor left one character.

Ctrl+Right    Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

Ctrl+Left     Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous word.

Home          Moves the cursor to the beginning of the current line.

End           Moves the cursor to the end of the current line.

Ctrl+Home     Moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line in the file.

Ctrl+End      Moves the cursor to the end of the last line in the file.

Page Up       Scrolls the text up one window.

Page Down     Scrolls the text down one window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 380. Help for Action bar keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select the System icon and action bar items.

Key:           Function:

F10            Switches between the action bar and the editing area.

Shift+Esc      Switches between the System icon and the editing area.

Right          Highlights the next action bar item or the System icon.

Left           Highlights the previous action bar item or the System icon.

Enter          Accesses the pull down of the highlighted action bar item or
               System icon.

Mnemonic       The mnemonic key is the key corresponding with the underlined
               letter in the action bar items.  It accesses the pull down of
               the action bar item containing the mnemonic.

Escape         Returns to the editing area.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 381. Help for Menu keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select pull down items.

Key:           Function:

Up             Moves up one pull down item.

Down           Moves down one pull down item.

Enter          Selects the highlighted pull down item.

Mnemonic       The mnemonic key is the key corresponding with the underlined
               letter in the pull down items.  It selects the pull down item
               containing the mnemonic.

Escape         Closes the pull down.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 382. Help for Dialog keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to select dialog box items.

Key:          Function:

Tab           Moves to the next control group on the dialog.

Shift+Tab     Moves to the previous control group on the dialog.

Right         Moves to the next button on the dialog.

Left          Moves to the previous button on the dialog.

Up            Moves up one item in a selection box.

Down          Moves down one item in a selection box.

Page Up       Scrolls up one page in a selection box with scroll bars.

Page Down     Scrolls down one page in a selection box with scroll bars.

Spacebar      Switches a check box on and off.

Enter         Starts the activity for the selected pushbutton.

Escape        Exits the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 383. Help for System keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use these keys to switch between, move, and size Presentation Manager windows.

Key:                Function:

Alt+Tab             Switches to the next Presentation Manager window.

Alt+Shift+Tab       Switches to the previous Presentation Manager window.

Alt+Esc             Switches to the next application (including
                    non-Presentation Manager applications).

Ctrl+Esc            Switches to the Task List.

Alt+F4              Closes the active window.

Alt+F5              Restores the active window.

Alt+F7              Moves the active window.

Alt+F8              Sizes the active window.

Alt+F9              Minimizes the active window.

Alt+F10             Maximizes the active window.